amslatex package amscls update from latex-tds (27aug06)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@2048 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
author: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2006-08-27 18:25:23 +0000
committer: Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> 2006-08-27 18:25:23 +0000
commit: 505a11a94e5dc6b9010250a0cae90880e6e23182 (patch)
tree: 86faf03bb38b3e09dcb5b3d438b36df8e1e11929 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
parent: 167411792c3173bffe5cc7ff0412c92e7a3a83af (diff)
11 files changed, 9022 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3422ab571fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+00readme.txt for AMS document classes amsart/book/proc 2.0 [2004/08/06]
+
+See manifest.txt for a list of all the files in the distribution.
+
+See install.txt for installation instructions.
+
+The document classes amsart, amsbook, amsproc and related packages are
+provided by the American Mathematical Society for authors to use with
+LaTeX. They produce the overall layout and appearance of AMS
+publications.
+
+In order to use an AMS document class you need to have TeX software
+installed first. TeX is not an AMS product. If you need information on
+getting TeX see one of the following:
+
+  http://www.tug.org/
+  http://www.ams.org/tex/tex-resources.html
+
+Documentation for the AMS document classes is found in
+
+  instr-l.pdf
+  diffs-c.txt
+  amsthdoc.pdf
+  thmtest.tex
+  thmtest.pdf
+
+which are included in the collection.  Additional documentation can be
+found in the amsclass FAQ:
+
+  http://www.ams.org/tex/amsclass-faq.html
+
+The recommended procedure for making a custom document class based on an
+AMS class is to make a copy of the relevant .cls file using a different
+name and edit the copy---e.g., copy amsbook.cls to mybook.cls. (In
+general we advise against using \LoadClass, unless the base class is
+frozen or changes to the base class are under your control.)
+
+For technical support:
+
+  American Mathematical Society
+  Technical Support
+  Publications Technical Group
+  P. O. Box 6248
+  Providence, RI 02940-6248
+  Phone: 800-321-4AMS (321-4267) (USA/Canada) or 401-455-4080
+  tech-support@ams.org
+
+========================================================================
+RECENT CHANGES
+
+---ams-c1.ins 2.20 2004/08/03
+Added amsmidx package.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.20 2004/08/06
+1. Added facility for additional line(s) in copyright block.
+2. Corrected handling of section heading with no title.
+3. Got rid of spurious "Appendix" in t-of-c in \backmatter.
+4. Changed MR number formatting to use new style as on MathSciNet.
+5. Created commands for various style elements and substituted them
+   for hard-coded values to simplify building derived classes.
+6. Added sectioning and otherwise cleaned up commentary.
+
+---amsclass.faq - 2004/08/06
+Removed from distribution; replaced by on-line FAQ at
+http://www.ams.org/tex/amsclass-faq.html
+
+---amsdtx.dtx 2.06 2004/08/06
+1. Reworked indexing commands for compatibility with doc.sty.
+2. Added option environment for enhanced indexing.
+3. Improved formatting.
+
+---amsthdoc.tex 2.20 2004/08/03
+1. Substantially rewritten for clarity.
+2. Added documentation for \newtheoremstyle.
+
+---instr-l.tex 2.20 2004/08/05
+Substantially rewritten for clarity and to add instructions for new
+features; see note on amsclass.dtx regarding features.
+
+---mrabbrev.bib - 2004/08/05
+Removed from distribution; this is now available separately from
+http://www.ams.org/tools/mrabbrev.bib 
+
+---thmtest.tex 2.01 2004/08/02
+1. Corrected counter for theorems with switched headers.
+2. Added section headings for clarity.
+3. Added example ending with a display and \qedhere.
+
+---upref.dtx 2.01 2004/07/29
+1. Added code to make package work with hyperref.
+2. Improved documentation.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.14 2004/04/26 (not released)
+1. Incorporated pending changes left by Michael Downes:
+  - Added trap in headings in case \thanks was set within \author,
+    and added \thanks@warning.
+  - Cleaned up and completed unfinished documentation.
+2. Added braces in \uppercasenonmath to limit scope.
+3. Added \contrib mechanism to handle "non-author" authors.
+4. Segregated definitions of administrative footnotes to permit easier
+   customization for AMS journals.
+5. Added explicit \bibliofont to permit easy change for special uses.
+6. Changed MR number formatting to correspond to new access numbers
+   used by MathSciNet.
+7. Added \@citestyle and \citeform to simplify font changes in citations.
+8. Added OT1 defaults for \DH, \dh, \DJ, \dj, required for author names.
+9. Added \markleft to permit changing of only left running head
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.13 2002/12/04 (not released)
+1. Fixed handling of theorem head punctuation with \swapnumbers.
+2. Changed \proofname to \providecommand in case it's already defined.
+3. Made \small, \Small, etc., robust.
+4. Better spacing in \l@figure to prevent overprinting of figure number.
+5. Changed handling of author names to prevent internal line breaks.
+6. Added \@noparitemfalse in \dth@everypar to prevent weird results in
+   certain (rare) kinds of usage.
+7. Some other cosmetic changes.
+
+---amsthdoc.tex 2.02 2000/06/06
+Use article class instead of amsldoc (which is overkill).
+
+---amsldoc.cls - 2000/06/06
+Removed from distribution, no longer needed by amsthdoc.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.07 2000/06/05
+Guard against \\ in argument of \author.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.06 2000/06/02
+Avoid using \@elt in qed stack because LaTeX output routine falls over
+if triggered when something else is using \@elt.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.05 2000/05/16
+1. Added \indexintro.
+2. Fixed erroneous init for thm@preskip, thm@postskip.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.04 2000/03/10
+\newtoks fix for old versions of LaTeX. Added some commentary about \cal.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.03 2000/01/17
+1. Removed dependency on amsgen package.
+2. Added a warning about graphics for the draft option.
+3. Improved qedhere handling for article/amsthm combination.
+
+---amsclass.dtx 2.02 2000/01/17
+Some fixes for the fleqn/qedhere case.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/ams-c1.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/ams-c1.ins
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3145608a278
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/ams-c1.ins
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "ams-c1.ins",
+%%%   version   = "2.20",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/03",
+%%%   time      = "14:18:09 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "43968 80 304 2992",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Electronic Products and Services,
+%%%                P. O. Box 6248,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02940,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1999 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@math.ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, amsart, amsbook, amsproc, amsthm, install",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This is an installation file that will generate
+%%%                loadable package and class files when run
+%%%                through \LaTeX{}.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\def\batchfile{ams-c1.ins}
+\input docstrip.tex
+\preamble
+\endpreamble
+
+\keepsilent
+
+\csname newtoks\endcsname\filesmsg
+\def\dofile#1#2#3{\generateFile{#1}{f}{\from{#2}{#3}}%
+  \filesmsg\expandafter{\the\filesmsg
+    \Msg{* \space\space#1}}}
+
+%    Packages
+\dofile{amsthm.sty}{amsclass.dtx}{amsthm}
+\dofile{upref.sty}{upref.dtx}{}
+\dofile{amsmidx.sty}{amsmidx.dtx}{}
+
+%    Document class amsart:
+\dofile{amsart.cls}{amsclass.dtx}{amsart,classes}
+%    Document class amsbook:
+\dofile{amsbook.cls}{amsclass.dtx}{amsbook,classes}
+%    Document class amsproc:
+\dofile{amsproc.cls}{amsclass.dtx}{amsproc,classes}
+
+%    Document class for printing AMS documentation files:
+\dofile{amsdtx.cls}{amsdtx.dtx}{amsdtx}
+
+\ifToplevel{
+\Msg{******************************************************************}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To get documentation for the amsart, amsbook, and amsproc}
+\Msg{* documentclasses, run LaTeX on instr-l.tex.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{* To get documentation for the amsthm package, run LaTeX on}
+\Msg{* amsthdoc.tex; see also thmtest.tex.}
+\Msg{*}
+\Msg{******************************************************************}
+}
+
+\endinput
+}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsclass.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsclass.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..956b379d23a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsclass.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,5204 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsclass.dtx",
+%%%   version   = "2.20",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/06",
+%%%   time      = "13:03:53 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "53558 5204 20497 185872",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1995, 1999, 2004
+%%%                American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, AMS, documentclass, theorem",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This is the source for the amsthm package and three
+%%%                AMS document classes: amsart, amsproc, and amsbook.
+%%%                They are designed for use with LaTeX.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+
+\CodelineIndex
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{%
+  The \cls{amsart}, \cls{amsproc}, and \cls{amsbook} document~classes}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\Michael Downes\\
+  updated by Barbara Beeton}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\hDocInput{amsclass.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+%  \section{Introduction}
+%    This file (\fn{amsclass.dtx}) is the master file for three \latex/
+%    document classes, \cls{amsart}, \cls{amsproc}, and \cls{amsbook},
+%    which are intended for articles and books containing mathematical
+%    research. They produce output that follows the style conventions of
+%    American Mathematical Society publications. The theorem setup
+%    features of these document classes are also available in a separate
+%    package, \pkg{amsthm}.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%  \section{Implementation}
+%
+%    Three document class files and one package file (\fn{amsthm.sty})
+%    are produced from this source. Most of the code of the \fn{amsthm}
+%    package is used in all four derived files. Most of the remaining
+%    code is used in all three document class files. Fine tuning is done
+%    with additional docstrip guards.
+%
+%    The usual name, date, and version information. (Note: the reason
+%    each \cs{ProvidesClass} command is placed on a line by itself, with
+%    separate begin and end guards for docstripping, is to make
+%    automatic update of file date and version slightly easier and more
+%    robust.)
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1995/06/01]% LaTeX date must be June 1995 or later
+%<*amsart>
+\ProvidesClass{amsart}[2004/08/06 v2.20]
+%</amsart>
+%<*amsproc>
+\ProvidesClass{amsproc}[2004/08/06 v2.20]
+%</amsproc>
+%<*amsbook>
+\ProvidesClass{amsbook}[2004/08/06 v2.20]
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For \pkg{amsthm} we need to guard against redundant loading via
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \documentclass{amsart}
+% \usepackage{amsthm}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    because in that case the usual \cs{RequirePackage} mechanism for
+%    avoiding redundant loading will not apply. We need to simulate the
+%    loading of the \pkg{amsthm} package.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*classes>
+\global\expandafter\let\csname ver@amsthm.sty\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname ver@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname
+%</classes>
+%<*amsthm>
+\ProvidesPackage{amsthm}[2004/08/06 v2.20]
+%</amsthm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The following code is shared by the classes and the \pkg{amsthm}
+%    package. Cf.~\fn{amsgen.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xp=\expandafter
+\let\@nx=\noexpand
+\def\@oparg#1[#2]{\@ifnextchar[{#1}{#1[#2]}}
+\long\def\@ifempty#1{\@xifempty#1@@..\@nil}
+\long\def\@xifempty#1#2@#3#4#5\@nil{%
+  \ifx#3#4\@xp\@firstoftwo\else\@xp\@secondoftwo\fi}
+\long\def\@ifnotempty#1{\@ifempty{#1}{}}
+\def\setboxz@h{\setbox\z@\hbox}
+\def\@addpunct#1{%
+  \relax\ifhmode
+    \ifnum\spacefactor>\@m \else#1\fi
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cn{nopunct} should have a value for \cn{spacefactor} that is
+%    not used for \cn{frenchspacing}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nopunct{\spacefactor 1007 }
+\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode`\.1006\sfcode`\?1005\sfcode`\!1004%
+  \sfcode`\:1003\sfcode`\;1002\sfcode`\,1001 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If this class is loaded by a parent document class, then we want
+%    to use the name of the parent class. Otherwise the name of the
+%    current class file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*classes>
+\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\edef\@classname{#1}}
+\expandafter\@tempa\@currnamestack{}{}{}\@nil
+\ifx\@classname\@empty \edef\@classname{\@currname}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Support for conditional text}
+%
+%    [This needs to be documented in the users' guide, including the
+%    idea of using \verb'\for{5ed}{\linebreak}' to mark edition-specific
+%    line and page breaks. [mjd,1999/12/27]]
+%
+%    We would sometimes like to be able to mark fragments of text to be
+%    conditionally discarded or typeset. For example in the title of a
+%    section if we want to add a linebreak but prevent this linebreak
+%    from also taking effect in the table of contents.
+%
+%    Certain kinds of switches need to be built into the low-level
+%    structure of our document class in order to be useful. For example,
+%    inside the toc we need to arrange for an \qq{in-toc?} test to yield
+%    true.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@True{00}
+\def\@False{01}
+\newcommand\newswitch[2][False]{%
+  \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname ?@#2\endcsname{%
+    \global\expandafter\let\csname ?@#2\expandafter\endcsname
+      \csname @#1\endcsname
+  }%
+}
+\newcommand{\setFalse}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname ?@#1\endcsname\@False
+}
+\newcommand{\setTrue}[1]{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname ?@#1\endcsname\@True
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The empty switch is by default false; i.e., if you write
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \for{}{...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    the material will be discarded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newswitch{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    To get a line break in a section title but not in the table of
+%    contents line for that section, use
+%    \verb'\except{toc}{\linebreak}'. (Presumably you are already giving
+%    a shortened running head version separately, if applicable.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\except}[1]{%
+  \if\csname ?@#1\endcsname \expandafter\@gobble
+  \else \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \fi
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\for}[1]{%
+  \if\csname ?@#1\endcsname \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \else \expandafter\@gobble
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cn{forany} command needs to run through a comma-separated list
+%    of switch names and print its second argument if any of the
+%    switches are true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\forany}[1]{%
+  \csname for@any@01\endcsname#1,?,\@nil
+}
+\@namedef{for@any@\@False}#1,{%
+  \csname for@any@%
+    \csname ?@\zap@space#1 \@empty\endcsname
+  \endcsname
+}
+\@namedef{?@?}{x}
+\@namedef{for@any@\@True}#1\@nil#2{#2}
+\def\for@any@x{\@car\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Options}
+%  \subsubsection{Notes}
+%    Options will be processed in the order they are declared;
+%    cf.~\cs{ProcessOptions}.
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Paper size}
+%
+%    The option \opt{letterpaper} (default) sets the target paper width
+%    and height to U.S. letter size, 8.5 in x 11 in. An option
+%    \opt{a4paper} is also supported, but we don't include some of the
+%    more unusual paper options (\opt{legalpaper}, \opt{a5paper},
+%    \opt{executivepaper}) of the generic \cls{article} class. For A4
+%    paper we not only change the paper size but also add 4pc to the
+%    normal textheight of 50.5pc (the difference between 297mm and 11in
+%    is 50pt).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\paperheight 297mm\paperwidth 210mm
+  \textheight 54.5pc }
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\paperheight 11in\paperwidth 8.5in }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The options \opt{landscape} and \opt{portrait} swap paper height
+%    and width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{landscape}{\@tempdima\paperheight
+  \paperheight\paperwidth \paperwidth\@tempdima}
+\DeclareOption{portrait}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Two-sided or one-sided printing}
+%
+%    For two-sided printing we set the switch \cs{if@twoside} which
+%    will cause the margins to be adjusted so that the type blocks of
+%    back-to-back pages will line up. The \cs{if@mparswitch} makes margin
+%    paragraphs print in the outside margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse \@mparswitchfalse}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue  \@mparswitchtrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Draft or final version}
+%
+%    The \opt{draft} option causes overfull lines to be marked with
+%    a black slug in the right margin.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\overfullrule5\p@
+  \ClassWarningNoLine{\@classname}{%
+    When the draft option is used, the
+      \protect\includegraphics\MessageBreak
+    command will print blank placeholder boxes\MessageBreak
+    for the graphics}%
+}
+\DeclareOption{final}{\overfullrule\z@ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Posting date}
+%
+%    The date when an article is officially posted to the WWW is recorded
+%    in a variable \cs{@dateposted} with the \cn{dateposted} command.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\dateposted#1{\def\@dateposted{#1}}%
+\let\@dateposted\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\def\@setdateposted{%
+  \newline Article electronically published on \@dateposted}
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Logos}
+%
+%    The following logo is used for regular journal articles. The one
+%    for proceedings articles and the one for e-only journals are given
+%    separately.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\def\article@logo{%
+  \set@logo{%
+    \publname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Current volume might be empty when an article is first posted to
+%    the WWW. In that case leave out the issue-specific info.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\@empty\currentvolume
+    \else \newline\volinfo, \pageinfo
+    \fi
+    \newline \@PII
+    \ifx\@empty\@dateposted \else \@setdateposted\fi
+  }%
+}
+\def\eonly@logo{%
+  \set@logo{%
+    \publname
+    \newline\volinfo, \pageinfo
+    \ifx\@empty\@dateposted \else \@setdateposted\fi
+    \newline \@PII
+  }%
+}
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\@logofont{\fontsize{6}{7\p@}\selectfont}
+\long\def\set@logo#1{%
+  \vbox to\headheight{%
+    \@parboxrestore \@logofont
+    \noindent#1\par\vss
+  }%
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsproc>
+\def\procart@logo{%
+  \set@logo{\publname
+    \ifx\@empty\volinfo \else\newline\volinfo\fi}%
+}
+%</amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{E-only journal}
+%
+%    Electronic-only journals (for \cls{amsart} only) have different
+%    information in the series logo than paper-only or dual journals.
+%    Only the volume number is reported (no issue or year), and the
+%    posting date is added following the page numbers.  [bnb, 1996/10/31]
+%
+%    This option will be invoked only from publication-specific \fn{.cls}
+%    files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\DeclareOption{e-only}{%
+  \def\volinfo{Volume \currentvolume}%
+  \dateposted{Xxxx XX, XXXX}%
+  \def\@setdateposted{\ (\@dateposted)}%
+  \let\article@logo\eonly@logo
+}
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Title page}
+%
+%    The title and related information can optionally be printed on a
+%    separate page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@titlepage
+\DeclareOption{titlepage}{\@titlepagetrue}
+\DeclareOption{notitlepage}{\@titlepagefalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Start on right- or left-hand page}
+%
+%    For some book series, it's permissible to start chapters on a
+%    left-hand page.  Default to `openright', the usual AMS book style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\newif\if@openright
+\DeclareOption{openright}{\@openrighttrue}
+\DeclareOption{openany}{\@openrightfalse}
+\@openrighttrue
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Two-column printing}
+%
+%    Two-column layout is handled through a predefined internal switch.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\@twocolumnfalse}
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\@twocolumntrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{The nomath option}
+%
+%    The \opt{nomath} option causes most of the extra math features to
+%    be omitted.  Some utility functions will be defined below if this
+%    option is specified.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{nomath}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Some font options}
+%
+%    The \opt{noamsfonts} option means to avoid declaring math alphabets
+%    or symbol fonts for the extra math fonts in the AMSFonts set. If
+%    these fonts are declared, it means that the corresponding \fn{.tfm}
+%    files are required even for documents that do not use any symbols
+%    from those fonts. So we allow optionally to not declare them, for
+%    convenience of users who don't have those fonts on their system and
+%    don't want the hassle of getting them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{noamsfonts}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \opt{psamsfonts} option, passed on to the \pkg{amsfonts} package,
+%    means that alternative \fn{.fd} files should be used that do not
+%    refer to \fn{.tfm} files for sizes 6,8,9 (which are not present in
+%    the PostScript (Type 1) AMS fonts set from Y\&Y/Blue Sky Research).
+%    This should also trigger the \opt{cmex10} option of \pkg{amsmath},
+%    to avoid trying to load sizes 7--9 of \fn{cmex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{psamsfonts}{%
+  \PassOptionsToPackage{psamsfonts}{amsfonts}%
+  \PassOptionsToPackage{cmex10}{amsmath}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Equation numbering on the left or right}
+%
+%    The option \opt{leqno}---equation numbers on the left---is the
+%    default in AMS styles. Therefore we provide also a \opt{reqno}
+%    option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftagsleft@
+\DeclareOption{leqno}{%
+  \tagsleft@true \PassOptionsToPackage{leqno}{amsmath}}
+\DeclareOption{reqno}{%
+  \tagsleft@false \PassOptionsToPackage{reqno}{amsmath}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Vertical centering of equation numbers}
+%    For multiline equations the equation number is by default centered
+%    vertically on the total height of the equation. To make the
+%    equation number print on the first line (for left-hand
+%    numbers) or the last line (right-hand numbers), there is a
+%    \opt{tbtags} option `top/bottom tags'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifctagsplit@
+\DeclareOption{centertags}{%
+  \ctagsplit@true \PassOptionsToPackage{centertags}{amsmath}}
+\DeclareOption{tbtags}{%
+  \ctagsplit@false \PassOptionsToPackage{tbtags}{amsmath}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Flush left displays}
+%
+%    The option \opt{fleqn} causes displayed equations to print
+%    aligned on the left instead of centered, with an indentation
+%    of \cs{mathindent} from the prevailing left margin. If the
+%    \pkg{amsmath} package is loaded, most of this code will be
+%    overridden, but it seems we need it anyway because of the
+%    possibility of the \opt{nomath} class option.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{fleqn}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Dealing with font sizes}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@mainsize}
+%  \begin{macro}{\@ptsize}
+%    Instead of the miserly \cs{@ptsize} variable from \latex/'s
+%    ancient history that contains only the last digit of the main
+%    typesize, we set up a proper variable \cs{@mainsize} that
+%    contains all the digits of the main typesize. Just in case it is
+%    needed for someone using an old package, we will keep
+%    \cs{@ptsize} also.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@mainsize}{10}
+\newcommand{\@ptsize}{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\larger}
+%  \begin{macro}{\smaller}
+%    This function is an easy byproduct of the work done to fold
+%    typesize-specific code into the main class file. The range of font
+%    sizes is \cn{normalsize}, \cn{small}, \cn{Small}, \cn{SMALL},
+%    \cn{tiny}, \cn{Tiny}, \cn{large}, \cn{Large}, \cn{LARGE},
+%    \cn{huge}, \cn{Huge}. Spaces are left at either end of the case
+%    statement to accommodate adding \cn{TINY} and \cn{HUGE} in the
+%    future but it's not clear that they're really needed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\larger}[1][1]{%
+  \count@\@currsizeindex \advance\count@#1\relax
+  \ifnum\count@<\z@ \count@\z@ \else\ifnum\count@>12 \count@12 \fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The various size-changing commands \cn{normalsize}, etc., will take
+%    care of updating \cs{@currsizeindex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifcase\count@
+    \Tiny\or\Tiny\or\tiny\or\SMALL\or\Small\or\small
+    \or\normalsize
+    \or\large\or\Large\or\LARGE\or\huge\or\Huge\else\Huge
+  \fi
+}
+\newcommand{\smaller}[1][1]{\larger[-#1]}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    The \cs{@adjustvertspacing} function adapts some vertical spacing
+%    amounts to the current type size. We don't expect large sections of
+%    vertical text to occur in the extraordinarily small or large type
+%    sizes, so the \cs{@adjustvertspacing} function is only called in
+%    the range between `footnote' size and `Large' size. Notice that no
+%    shrinkability is used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@adjustvertspacing{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{big/med/smallskipamount} are generic space values that will be
+%    used by the commands \cn{bigskip}, \cn{medskip}, \cn{smallskip}. We
+%    also link the spacing around displayed equations to these amounts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \bigskipamount.7\baselineskip plus.7\baselineskip
+  \medskipamount\bigskipamount \divide\medskipamount\tw@
+  \smallskipamount\medskipamount \divide\smallskipamount\tw@
+  \abovedisplayskip\medskipamount
+  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The above-display short space is zero but with the same
+%    stretchability as the above-display normal space. And the
+%    below-display short space is similar, but has a base value equal to
+%    \cs{smallskipamount}. Use of the multiplier |1| is an arcane \TeX{}
+%    trick that coerces the skip value to a dimen value, i.e., gives us
+%    the base value of the skip register without the stretch or shrink
+%    values.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
+  \advance\abovedisplayshortskip-1\abovedisplayskip
+  \belowdisplayshortskip\abovedisplayshortskip
+  \advance\belowdisplayshortskip 1\smallskipamount
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The traditional value for \cs{jot} is 3pt, which we generalize
+%    to \cs{baselineskip}/4. This is used to adjust interline spacing in
+%    multiline displayed equations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \jot\baselineskip \divide\jot 4 \relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}%
+%
+%    We fill out the range of typesize changing commands to a full
+%    eleven: five large/huge commands and five small/tiny commands. (The
+%    capitalization of the command names suggests that there should
+%    actually be thirteen---add \cn{TINY} and \cn{HUGE}---but let's be
+%    conservative and leave those out until a real need for them is
+%    known to exist.) An unavoidable side effect is that \cn{tiny} now
+%    selects 6pt instead of 5pt by default.
+%
+%    In version 1.1 of \cls{amsart} and \cls{amsbook} \cn{small} was
+%    the same as \cn{footnotesize} (\cls{amsproc} didn't exist in v. 1.1).
+%
+%    The only size-changing command that is predefined by \latex/ is
+%    \cn{normalsize}; that's why it's the only one for which we use
+%    \cn{renewcommand} below.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\normalsize{\@xsetfontsize\normalsize 6%
+  \@adjustvertspacing \let\@listi\@listI}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Tiny}{\@xsetfontsize\Tiny 1}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\tiny}{\@xsetfontsize\tiny 2}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\SMALL}{\@xsetfontsize\SMALL 3}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Small}{\@xsetfontsize\Small 4%
+  \@adjustvertspacing
+  \def\@listi{\topsep\smallskipamount \parsep\z@skip \itemsep\z@skip
+    \leftmargin=\leftmargini
+    \labelwidth=\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  }%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\small}{\@xsetfontsize\small 5\@adjustvertspacing}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For backward compatibility we had better define \cn{footnotesize}
+%    and \cn{scriptsize}. Also there is the small discrepancy with
+%    \cn{tiny} to worry about.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnotesize{\Small}
+\def\scriptsize{\SMALL}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The sizes above 10pt use magstep values, stored in the functions
+%    \cs{@xipt}, \cs{@xiipt}, etc.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\large}{\@xsetfontsize\large 7\@adjustvertspacing}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Large}{\@xsetfontsize\Large 8\@adjustvertspacing}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\LARGE}{\@xsetfontsize\LARGE 9}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\huge}{\@xsetfontsize\huge{10}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\Huge}{\@xsetfontsize\Huge{11}}
+%\DeclareRobustCommand\HUGE{\@xsetfontsize\HUGE{12}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    So now we had better define the \cs{@xsetfontsize} function.
+%    The size-changing commands use \cs{@setfontsize} instead of
+%    \cn{fontsize} to (a)~give an error message if used in math mode and
+%    (b)~set the \cs{@currsize} variable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xsetfontsize#1#2{%
+  \chardef\@currsizeindex#2\relax
+  \edef\@tempa{\@nx\@setfontsize\@nx#1%
+    \@xp\ifcase\@xp\@currsizeindex\@typesizes
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add nonsense values 99/99 at the end just in case some extreme
+%    error turns up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \else{99}{99}\fi}%
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For the record let's initialize \cs{@currsizeindex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\@currsizeindex=6
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Set page-breaking penalties to prevent all widows, orphans, and
+%    hyphens at the end of a page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+\brokenpenalty=10000
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Set some default linespacing values. The variable \cs{linespacing}
+%    is usually the normal interline space in the main text. It is used
+%    to specify vertical space for elements such as section heads and
+%    theorems in proportion to the normal interline space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\linespacing
+\lineskip=1pt \lineskiplimit=1pt
+\normallineskip=1pt \normallineskiplimit=1pt
+\let\baselinestretch=\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Settings for \cn{textheight} and \cn{textwidth}. We start with the
+%    value 50.5pc specified in AMS journal specifications as the total
+%    height of the type block and then subtract the running head height
+%    and adjust for \cs{topskip} to get the proper value for the text
+%    block.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\headheight=8pt \headsep=14pt
+%<amsbook>\footskip=18pt
+%<amsart|amsproc>\footskip=12pt
+\textheight=50.5pc \topskip=10pt
+\textwidth=30pc
+\columnsep=10pt \columnseprule=0pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Some settings for marginpars.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\marginparwidth=90pt
+\marginparsep=11pt
+\marginparpush=5pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To avoid setting text before begin-document, we postpone the
+%    setting of \cs{footnotesep} using \cs{AtBeginDocument}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{\settoheight{\footnotesep}{\footnotesize M$^1$}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\footins=7pt plus11pt
+\skip\@mpfootins=\skip\footins
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\fboxsep=3pt \fboxrule=.4pt
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\arrayrulewidth=.4pt    \doublerulesep=2pt
+\labelsep=5pt           \arraycolsep=\labelsep
+\tabcolsep=\labelsep    \tabbingsep=\labelsep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\floatsep=15pt plus 12pt    \dblfloatsep=15pt plus 12pt
+\textfloatsep=\floatsep  \dbltextfloatsep=15pt plus 12pt
+\intextsep=\floatsep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@fptop=0pt plus1fil     \@dblfptop=0pt plus1fil
+\@fpbot=0pt plus1fil     \@dblfpbot=0pt plus1fil
+\@fpsep=8pt plus2fil     \@dblfpsep=8pt plus2fil\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Note that \cs{parskip} gets no stretch; this is at variance with
+%    the generic \latex/ classes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\parskip=0pt \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \cs{@parboxrestore}, used by \cs{@footnotetext}, sets
+%    \cs{parindent} to |0pt|; since this is not what we want, we
+%    make a new dimen \cs{normalparindent} and after calling
+%    \cs{@parboxrestore}, \cs{@footnotetext} resets
+%    \cs{parindent} back to normal.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\normalparindent
+%<amsart>\normalparindent=12pt
+%<amsproc|amsbook>\normalparindent=18pt
+\parindent=\normalparindent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\partopsep=0pt \relax \parsep=0pt \relax \itemsep=0pt \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@lowpenalty=51         \@medpenalty=151        \@highpenalty=301
+\@beginparpenalty=-\@lowpenalty
+\@endparpenalty=-\@lowpenalty
+\@itempenalty=-\@lowpenalty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Typesize-specific code}
+%
+%    The class option \opt{12pt} sets the main typesize to 12 pt and
+%    makes various adaptations, primarily sliding the size-changing
+%    commands up the scale of magsteps. This makes it more likely that
+%    someone with bitmapped fonts will have all the fonts and sizes
+%    that they need. The \opt{8pt} option is for those who like to
+%    conserve paper.
+%
+%    By parameterizing some aspects it is possible to make a great deal
+%    of the typesize-specific code automatically adapt to the selected
+%    size. Then there is so little typesize-specific code remaining
+%    that it no longer makes sense to put the code in separate \fn{.clo}
+%    files. So instead of analogs for the generic \fn{size10,11,12.clo}
+%    files we have the code for those options entirely contained in the
+%    \fn{.cls} file in the form of declared options.
+%
+%    Some miscellaneous remarks.
+%
+%    ---If PostScript fonts are used, it may seem a little strange to
+%    use fonts following the magstep'd point sizes 10.95, 14.4, 17.28,
+%    20.74, 24.88 instead of simply 11, 14, 17, 21, 25. But it is not
+%    easy for us to make that distinction here in the document class
+%    definitions of the fontsize changing commands. So we don't try.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\@mainsize{10}\def\@ptsize{0}%
+  \def\@typesizes{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    There should be 11 typesize/baselineskip pairs: five below
+%    \cn{normalsize} and five above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \or{5}{6}\or{6}{7}\or{7}{8}\or{8}{10}\or{9}{11}%
+    \or{10}{12}% normalsize
+    \or{\@xipt}{13}\or{\@xiipt}{14}\or{\@xivpt}{17}%
+    \or{\@xviipt}{20}\or{\@xxpt}{24}}%
+  \normalsize \linespacing=\baselineskip
+}
+%
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\@mainsize{11}\def\@ptsize{1}%
+  \def\@typesizes{%
+    \or{6}{7}\or{7}{8}\or{8}{10}\or{9}{11}\or{10}{12}%
+    \or{\@xipt}{13}% normalsize
+    \or{\@xiipt}{14}\or{\@xivpt}{17}\or{\@xviipt}{20}%
+    \or{\@xxpt}{24}\or{\@xxvpt}{30}}%
+  \normalsize \linespacing=\baselineskip
+}
+%
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\@mainsize{12}\def\@ptsize{2}%
+  \def\@typesizes{%
+    \or{7}{8}\or{8}{10}\or{9}{11}\or{10}{12}\or{\@xipt}{13}%
+    \or{\@xiipt}{14}% normalsize
+    \or{\@xivpt}{17}\or{\@xviipt}{20}\or{\@xxpt}{24}%
+    \or{\@xxvpt}{30}\or{\@xxvpt}{30}}%
+  \normalsize \linespacing=\baselineskip
+}
+%
+\DeclareOption{8pt}{\def\@mainsize{8}\def\@ptsize{8}%
+  \def\@typesizes{%
+    \or{5}{6}\or{5}{6}\or{5}{6}\or{6}{7}\or{7}{8}%
+    \or{8}{10}% normalsize
+    \or{9}{11}\or{10}{12}\or{\@xipt}{13}%
+    \or{\@xiipt}{14}\or{\@xivpt}{17}}%
+  \normalsize \linespacing=\baselineskip
+}
+%
+\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\@mainsize{9}\def\@ptsize{9}%
+  \def\@typesizes{%
+    \or{5}{6}\or{5}{6}\or{6}{7}\or{7}{8}\or{8}{10}%
+    \or{9}{11}% normalsize
+    \or{10}{12}\or{\@xipt}{13}\or{\@xiipt}{14}%
+    \or{\@xivpt}{17}\or{\@xviipt}{20}}%
+  \normalsize \linespacing=\baselineskip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsubsection{Running heads}
+%    The normal application of pagestyle functions \cs{ps@xxx} is to
+%    determine the contents of running heads and feet. The function
+%    \cs{@mkboth} is used internally by commands \cn{chapter},
+%    \cn{section}, and the like to set the running heads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@empty{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+  \let\@oddhead\@empty \let\@evenhead\@empty
+  \let\@oddfoot\@empty \let\@evenfoot\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The current implementation in \cls{amsart}/\cls{amsproc}/\cls{amsbook}
+%    of the vertical space at the top of an opening page uses \cs{topskip},
+%    which means that we need to do some resetting here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\topskip\normaltopskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Pagestyle `plain' has the page numbers in the running feet.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@plain{\ps@empty
+  \def\@oddfoot{\normalfont\scriptsize \hfil\thepage\hfil}%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Pagestyle `headings' uses text from sectioning commands for
+%    running heads.  Empty running feet.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newswitch{runhead}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@headings{\ps@empty
+  \def\@evenhead{%
+    \setTrue{runhead}%
+    \normalfont\scriptsize
+    \rlap{\thepage}\hfil
+    \def\thanks{\protect\thanks@warning}%
+    \leftmark{}{}\hfil}%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+    \setTrue{runhead}%
+    \normalfont\scriptsize \hfil
+    \def\thanks{\protect\thanks@warning}%
+    \rightmark{}{}\hfil \llap{\thepage}}%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+%<*amsbook>
+  \def\partmark{\@secmark\markboth\partrunhead\partname}%
+  \def\chaptermark{%
+    \@secmark\markboth\chapterrunhead{}}%
+  \def\sectionmark{%
+    \@secmark\markright\sectionrunhead\sectionname}%
+%</amsbook>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\sectionname}
+%  \begin{macro}{\subsectionname}
+%  \begin{macro}{\subsubsectionname}
+%  \begin{macro}{\paragraphname}
+%  \begin{macro}{\subparagraphname}
+%    Initialize section headings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sectionname\@empty
+\let\subsectionname\@empty
+\let\subsubsectionname\@empty
+\let\paragraphname\@empty
+\let\subparagraphname\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    The default definitions of \cs{leftmark}, \cs{rightmark} are not
+%    what we want: the section title (or whatever) reported in the
+%    right-hand running head should report the section that is current
+%    at the bottom of the right-hand page. And the left-hand running
+%    head should report the status at the top of the page.
+%    Cf.~\fn{amsppt.sty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\leftmark{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\topmark{}{}}
+\def\rightmark{\expandafter\@secondoftwo\botmark{}{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Journal and Proceedings articles require an indication of the first
+%    page so the logo and copyright line can appear.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\ps@firstpage{\ps@plain
+  \def\@oddfoot{\normalfont\scriptsize \hfil\thepage\hfil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Stick in the reset of \cs{topskip} here so it only gets executed
+%    after the first page is completed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     \global\topskip\normaltopskip}%
+  \let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot
+  \def\@oddhead{\@serieslogo\hss}%
+  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead % in case an article starts on a left-hand page
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@nilgobble}
+%    Something that apparently doesn't exist in the kernel?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@nilgobble#1\@nil{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    A general section-marking function. Arg 1 is either \cn{markright}
+%    or \cn{markboth} indicating which kind of marking action is desired
+%    (this gives us some string pool/hash table savings by allowing the
+%    \cs{@secmark} function to serve for both cases). Arg 2 is the
+%    function that should be called in the running head to process the
+%    remaining three args. Arg 3 is normally \cs{xxxname} (but could be
+%    empty). Arg 4 is the section-title text. Assumption: whenever
+%    \cs{@secmark} is called, the section-number variable
+%    \cs{@secnumber} has been set to the value of the current section
+%    number (possibly empty, in the case of a |*| section for example).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\@secmark#1#2#3#4{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We want to apply expansion to \cs{xxxname} and \cs{thexxx} but not
+%    to the other elements.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+  \edef\@tempa{\endgroup \toks@{\protect#2{#3}{\@secnumber}}}%
+  \@tempa
+  \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@{#4}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If a \cn{markright} operation is called for, use the current
+%    left-mark via \cs{@temptokena}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \afterassignment\@nilgobble\@temptokena\@themark{}\@nil
+  \edef\@tempa{\@nx\@mkboth{%
+    \ifx\markright#1\the\@temptokena\else\the\toks@\fi}{\the\toks@}}%
+  \@tempa}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Init \cs{@secnumber}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@secnumber\@empty
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Fix \cn{markboth} so that \cs{@secmark} can work without too much
+%    thrashing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markboth#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    \@temptokena{{#1}{#2}}\xdef\@themark{\the\@temptokena}%
+    \mark{\the\@temptokena}%
+  \endgroup
+  \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    With the myheadings pagestyle, no automatic running heads will be
+%    provided by the document class; only running heads specified by
+%    the user through explicit \cn{markboth} or \cn{markright}
+%    commands will be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@myheadings{\ps@headings \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Save normal topskip value in a skip register.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\normaltopskip
+\normaltopskip=10pt \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We also want to turn off all section marks.  First-level section
+%    heads will be defined in \cs{ps@headings}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\sectionmark\@gobble
+\let\subsectionmark\@gobble
+\let\subsubsectionmark\@gobble
+\let\paragraphmark\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+
+%  \subsubsection{Unrecognized options}
+%
+%    The \opt{makeidx} option is redundant; everything that it does in
+%    the generic \latex/ classes is already done anyway in this class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{makeidx}{}
+%</classes>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Unrecognized options for \pkg{amsthm} are treated as references
+%    to auxiliary theorem setup (\fn{.thm}) files.  This allows a user
+%    to create theorem styles using internal commands (with |@| signs)
+%    without having to be concerned about category coding.
+%
+%    Here is an example from the file \fn{thmtest.tex} which is part
+%    of this collection.  See that file for further information.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \begin{filecontents}{exercise.thm}
+% \def\th@exercise{%
+%   \normalfont % body font
+%   \thm@headpunct{:}%
+% }
+% \end{filecontents}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    This facility is available only when \pkg{amsthm} is used as an
+%    independent package, not as part of an AMS document class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsthm>
+\DeclareOption*{\input{\CurrentOption .thm}}
+\ProcessOptions
+%</amsthm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Process options}
+%
+%    Black boxes for overfull lines are turned off by default (the
+%    \opt{final} option). This can be overridden with the \opt{draft}
+%    option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*classes>
+\ExecuteOptions{leqno,centertags,letterpaper,portrait,%
+  10pt,twoside,onecolumn,final}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Options will be processed in the order of the associated
+%    \cs{DeclareOption} commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In compatibility  mode, we want to load the frozen version of
+%    \fn{amstex.sty} instead of the \pkg{amsmath} package. This is
+%    rather a horrible kluge but I can't see anything better at the
+%    moment. [mjd,1995/01/27]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+  \def\@tempa{\RequirePackage{amstex}\relax}%
+\else
+  \@ifclasswith{\@classname}{nomath}{%
+    \let\@tempa\relax
+  }{%
+    \def\@tempa{\RequirePackage{amsmath}\relax}%
+  }%
+\fi
+\@tempa % load amstex.sty or amsmath.sty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the \opt{nomath} option was specified, then \cn{numberwithin}
+%    and \cs{@emptytoks} remain to be defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{numberwithin}{%
+  \newcommand{\numberwithin}[3][\arabic]{%
+    \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@nocounterr{#2}}{%
+      \@ifundefined{c@#3}{\@nocnterr{#3}}{%
+        \@addtoreset{#2}{#3}%
+        \@xp\xdef\csname the#2\endcsname{%
+          \@xp\@nx\csname the#3\endcsname .\@nx#1{#2}}}}%
+  }
+  \csname newtoks\endcsname\@emptytoks
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If the \opt{noamsfonts} option was called for, skip the
+%    \pkg{amsfonts} package load.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility
+\else
+  \@ifclasswith{\@classname}{noamsfonts}{%
+    % amsfonts package is not wanted
+  }{%
+    % amsfonts package IS wanted; test whether a recent enough version
+    % seems to be installed
+    \begingroup \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{msa}\try@load@fontshape\endgroup
+    \global\@xp\let\csname U+msa\endcsname\relax % reset
+    \@ifundefined{U/msa/m/n}{%
+      \ClassError{\@classname}{%
+  Package `amsfonts' not installed, or version too old?\MessageBreak
+  Unable to get font info for the `msam' fonts in the expected form%
+      }{%
+  The amsfonts package will not be loaded, to avoid probable\MessageBreak
+  incompatibility problems. You can (a) use the `noamsfonts'
+      documentclass\MessageBreak
+  option next time, or (b) check that the amsfonts package is
+      installed\MessageBreak
+  correctly, and is not too old to be compatible.%
+      }%
+    }{%
+      \RequirePackage{amsfonts}[1995/01/01]\relax
+    }%
+  }
+\fi % end yesamsfonts branch
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \subsection{Basic AMS style features}
+%
+%    AMS style requires that blank pages between chapters be \emph{really}
+%    blank: no running heads, no page numbers.  To accomplish this,
+%    redefine \cn{cleardoublepage} to do the right thing.  [bnb, 1999/07/17]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\cleardouble@page\cleardoublepage
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Postpone the redefinition of \cs{cleardoublepage} to begin-document
+%    to work around difficulties with old versions of \fn{gsm-l.cls}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \ifx\cleardouble@page\cleardoublepage
+    \def\cleardoublepage{\clearpage{\pagestyle{empty}\cleardouble@page}}
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Now a utility macro to do \cn{uppercase} but sidestep any math, to
+%    prevent uppercasing math variables.  In order to be handled properly
+%    the |$...$| or |\(...\)| must be on the outer level (not
+%    enclosed in braces).  We did not try to handle the possibility
+%    |\begin{math}| |...| |\end{math}| in a title at the present time (too
+%    complicated).  Also we increase inter-word space in the uppercase
+%    text.
+%
+%    One other little problem: uppercasing of a few special characters
+%    like the German {\ss} (\cn{ss}) and the undotted i and j (\cn{i}
+%    and \cn{j}), used sometimes with accents. We redefine them to be
+%    uppercase equivalents. (Undotted \cn{i} and \cn{j} in math would be
+%    typed as \cn{imath} and \cn{jmath}.)
+%
+%    Spaceskip is changed in accordance with recommendations for
+%    increased interword spacing in all-caps text by e.g.\ `Words into
+%    Type'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\uppercasenonmath}[1]{\toks@\@emptytoks
+%    Insert an extra \@empty to avoid removing braces around arg \arg{1}.
+  \@xp\@skipmath\@xp\@empty#1$$%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cs{protect} here is in case the shorttitle gets used for
+%    shortauthors and we get redundant application of \cn{MakeUppercase}.
+%    Double braces limit the scope so that later elements in title block
+%    aren't uppercased, e.g., \cn{i} in an address.  [bnb, 2004/04/01]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef#1{{\@nx\protect\@nx\@upprep\the\toks@}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@upprep}
+%    Preparations for printing all-caps text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@upprep}{%
+  \spaceskip1.3\fontdimen2\font plus1.3\fontdimen3\font
+  \upchars@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\upchars@}
+%    In all-caps text, esszet should print as SS, dotless i should print
+%    as normal cap I, Mc should print with a small-caps (not lowercase)
+%    c, and so forth.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\upchars@}{%
+  \def\ss{SS}\def\i{I}\def\j{J}\def\ae{\AE}\def\oe{\OE}%
+  \def\o{\O}\def\aa{\AA}\def\l{\L}\def\Mc{M{\scshape c}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\Mc}
+%    The use of \cn{Mc} makes it possible for `Mc' to get special
+%    treatment when uppercasing is applied.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\Mc}{Mc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@skipmath}
+%  \begin{macro}{\@xskipmath}
+%    \cs{@skipmath} searches for |$...$| in order to keep from applying
+%    \cn{uppercase} to the contents. Then it calls \cs{@xskipmath} to
+%    search for |\(...\)|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@skipmath}{}
+\long\def\@skipmath#1$#2${%
+  \@xskipmath#1\(\)%
+  \@ifnotempty{#2}{\toks@\@xp{\the\toks@$#2$}\@skipmath\@empty}}%
+%
+\newcommand{\@xskipmath}{}
+\long\def\@xskipmath#1\(#2\){%
+%    Expand away the added \@empty
+  \uppercase{\toks@\@xp\@xp\@xp{\@xp\the\@xp\toks@#1}}%
+  \@ifnotempty{#2}{\toks@\@xp{\the\toks@\(#2\)}\@xskipmath\@empty}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\altucnm}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\altucnm#1{%
+  \MakeTextUppercase{\toks@{#1}}%
+  \edef#1{\the\toks@}%
+}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{MakeTextUppercase}{}{\let\uppercasenonmath\altucnm}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    For older versions of \latex/ this might be needed too:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{MakeUppercase}{\let\MakeUppercase\uppercase}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\today}
+%    The command \cn{today} produces today's date in the form most
+%    commonly used in the U.S.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\today}{%
+  \relax\ifcase\month\or
+  January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+  July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+  \space\number\day, \number\year}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \subsection{Old font commands}
+%    The \cn{em} command is not redefined here (let's say, to give an
+%    `obsolete' warning and recommend instead \cn{emph}) because there
+%    is no alternative internal command \cs{emshape}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    This warning might have been a good idea back in 1995 but I don't
+%    think we can add it now [mjd,2000/03/10].
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%%\if@compatibility
+%%\else
+%%  \def\@obsolete@fontswitch#1#2#3{%
+%%    \@latex@warning@no@line{%
+%%      Command {\string#1...}\on@line\space is obsolete;\MessageBreak
+%%      the LaTeX2e equivalent is \string#3{...}}%
+%%    \gdef#1{\@fontswitch\relax#3}%
+%%  }
+%%  \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{%
+%%    \@xp\@obsolete@fontswitch\csname cal \endcsname\relax\mathcal}
+%%  \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{%
+%%    \@xp\@obsolete@fontswitch\csname mit \endcsname\relax\mathnormal}
+%%\fi
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    There's too great a chance that some people out there have
+%    documents that begin with
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\documentclass{amsart}
+%...
+%\newcommand{\cal}{\mathcal}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    and such documents would now get error messages.
+%
+%    Since \cs{cal} is not documented as a valid command for \LaTeXe/, I
+%    think it is OK to leave the status as is for AMS document classes.
+%    If you use \cs{documentstyle}, \cs{cal} will work. If you use
+%    \cs{documentclass}, well, it's a good idea to update to
+%    \cs{mathcal} instead of leaving old instances of \cs{cal}.
+%
+%  \subsection{Top matter}
+%    For the \cn{title} command, we support an optional argument to give
+%    a shortened version of the title for running heads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*{\title}[2][]{\gdef\shorttitle{#1}\gdef\@title{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The default value for the optional argument is `same as the
+%    mandatory arg' but there doesn't seem to be an easy way to get that
+%    effect with \ncn{[re]newcommand}. Here is how to use \cs{@dblarg}
+%    in conjunction with the preceding \cn{newcommand}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\title{\@nx\@dblarg
+  \@xp\@nx\csname\string\title\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cn{author} command accepts an optional argument similar to
+%    that of the \cn{title} command.
+%    Moved update of \cn{addresses} within scope of \cs{else} to avoid
+%    adding anything if no authors, and thus avoiding output of ``Author
+%    address'' on monograph titlepage.  [bnb, 1996/11/03]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\author}[2][]{%
+  \ifx\@empty\authors
+    \gdef\authors{#2}%
+  \else
+    \g@addto@macro\authors{\and#2}%
+    \g@addto@macro\addresses{\author{}}%
+  \fi
+  \@ifnotempty{#1}{%
+    \ifx\@empty\shortauthors
+      \gdef\shortauthors{#1}%
+    \else
+      \g@addto@macro\shortauthors{\and#1}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+\edef\author{\@nx\@dblarg
+  \@xp\@nx\csname\string\author\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Initialize some variables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\shortauthors\@empty   \let\authors\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\contrib}
+%
+%    Contributors are similar to authors except that they are responsible
+%    for only part of a work, e.g., an appendix.  The optional argument
+%    for the first contributor of a group identifies what has been
+%    contributed.  There can be more than one group of contributors;
+%    each group is treated separately, using the same ``and'' conventions
+%    within the group as for authors.  Contributor groups are strung
+%    together separated by a comma; if the word ``and'' is desired before
+%    the final group of contributors, it must be included in the optional
+%    argument for that group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\newif\ifresetcontrib  \resetcontribfalse
+\newcommand\contrib[2][]{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \ifx\@empty\@tempa
+  \else
+    \ifresetcontrib \@xcontribs
+    \else \global\resetcontribtrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifx\@empty\contribs
+    \gdef\contribs{#1 #2}%
+  \else
+    \g@addto@macro\contribs{\and#1 #2}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Accumulate contribs separately for the table of contents.  Here,
+%    this is just a dummy; it is fully defined for in-house processing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@wraptoccontribs{#1}{#2}%
+}
+\def\wraptoccontribs#1#2{}
+\def\@xcontribs{%
+  \author@andify\contribs
+  \ifx\@empty\xcontribs
+    \xdef\xcontribs{\contribs}%
+  \else
+    \xdef\xcontribs{\xcontribs, \contribs}%
+  \fi
+  \let\contribs\@empty
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Initialize some more variables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\contribs\@empty  \let\xcontribs\@empty  \let\toccontribs\@empty
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+\let\addresses\@empty      \let\thankses\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The optional arguments of \cn{address}, \cn{curraddr}, \cn{email}
+%    are to indicate which author the address applies to, if a document
+%    has multiple authors and there is not a normal one-to-one
+%    correspondence between authors and addresses.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\address}[2][]{\g@addto@macro\addresses{\address{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\curraddr}[2][]{\g@addto@macro\addresses{\curraddr{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\email}[2][]{\g@addto@macro\addresses{\email{#1}{#2}}}
+\newcommand{\urladdr}[2][]{\g@addto@macro\addresses{\urladdr{#1}{#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Someone who does not look closely at the \cls{amsart} documentation
+%    is likely to put the \cn{thanks} command inside that argument of
+%    \cn{author}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\thanks@warning#1{%
+  \ClassError{\@classname}{%
+    \protect\thanks\space should be given separately, not inside author name.%
+  }\@ehb
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\thanks}[1]{%
+  \@ifnotempty{#1}{\g@addto@macro\thankses{\thanks{#1}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The following example of addresses for three authors of a
+%    tri-author paper illustrates the kind of complications that need to
+%    be handled.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%  \author{Roland Campbell}
+%  \address{Department of Mathematics\\
+%    Pennsylvania State University\\
+%    Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 13593}
+%  \email[R.~Campbell]{campr@@galois.psu.edu}
+%
+%  \author{Mark M. Dane}
+%  % Same address as R. Campbell
+%  \curraddr[M.~Dane]{Atmospheric Research Station\\
+%    Pala Lundi, Fiji}
+%  \email[M.~Dane]{DaneMark@@ffr.choice}
+%
+%  \author{Jeremiah Jones}
+%  \address[J.~Jones]{Department of Philosophy\\
+%  Freedman College\\
+%  Periwinkle, Colorado 84320}
+%  \email[J.~Jones]{id739e@@oseoi44 (Bitnet)}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    In an article, typesetting of the address information is done at
+%    the end of the document, by calling \cs{@setaddresses}. This is done
+%    through a parent function \cs{enddoc@text}, because some AMS journals
+%    also print the abstract there instead of at the beginning, and it's
+%    easier to redefine \cs{enddoc@text} than to try undoing material
+%    already added to the \cs{AtEndDocument} hook.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\enddoc@text{\ifx\@empty\@translators \else\@settranslators\fi
+  \ifx\@empty\addresses \else\@setaddresses\fi}
+\AtEndDocument{\enddoc@text}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\curraddrname{{\itshape Current address}}
+\def\emailaddrname{{\itshape E-mail address}}
+\def\urladdrname{{\itshape URL}}
+\def\@setaddresses{\par
+  \nobreak \begingroup
+%<amsart|amsproc>\footnotesize
+  \def\author##1{\nobreak\addvspace\bigskipamount}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Address is supposed to go all on one line, so we redefine |\\|
+%    to just insert a comma instead of doing a line break.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\\{\unskip, \ignorespaces}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    No page breaks in the address section is accomplished by
+%    |\interlinepenalty\@M| and by the \cn{nobreak} before the \cn{bigskip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \interlinepenalty\@M
+  \def\address##1##2{\begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If there are two addresses for the same author, add a \cn{bigskip}
+%    between them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \par\addvspace\bigskipamount\indent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the name of the author to whom this address applies
+%    was given, typeset it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifnotempty{##1}{(\ignorespaces##1\unskip) }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now the main part of the address:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {\scshape\ignorespaces##2}\par\endgroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Current address:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\curraddr##1##2{\begingroup
+    \@ifnotempty{##2}{\nobreak\indent\curraddrname
+      \@ifnotempty{##1}{, \ignorespaces##1\unskip}\/:\space
+      ##2\par}\endgroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And then email. In versions 1.0 and 1.1 |@@| was required to print
+%    a single \qc{\@} character; for bulletproofing we convert doubled
+%    \qc{\@} characters if found.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\email##1##2{\begingroup
+    \@ifnotempty{##2}{\nobreak\indent\emailaddrname
+      \@ifnotempty{##1}{, \ignorespaces##1\unskip}\/:\space
+      \ttfamily##2\par}\endgroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    URLaddr is simply a replica of the email address, with the
+%    addition of a feature to enable |~| to print.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\urladdr##1##2{\begingroup
+    \def~{\char`\~}%
+    \@ifnotempty{##2}{\nobreak\indent\urladdrname
+      \@ifnotempty{##1}{, \ignorespaces##1\unskip}\/:\space
+      \ttfamily##2\par}\endgroup}%
+  \addresses
+  \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Some other administrative info. For \cn{date} we can just use the
+%    default definition provided by \latex/, except that we initialize
+%    the date to empty instead of to \cn{today}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@date\@empty
+\def\dedicatory#1{\def\@dedicatory{#1}}
+\let\@dedicatory=\@empty
+\def\keywords#1{\def\@keywords{#1}}
+\let\@keywords=\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    To allow various versions of the subject classification, accept an
+%    optional value to identify the version, provide text for the two
+%    currently in use, and give a warning if the version specified is
+%    unknown.  Default to 1991 version.  [bnb, 1999/04/30]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\subjclass[2][1991]{%
+  \def\@subjclass{#2}%
+  \@ifundefined{subjclassname@#1}{%
+    \ClassWarning{\@classname}{Unknown edition (#1) of Mathematics
+      Subject Classification; using '1991'.}%
+  }{%
+    \@xp\let\@xp\subjclassname\csname subjclassname@#1\endcsname
+  }%
+}
+\let\@subjclass=\@empty
+%<amsart>\def\commby#1{\def\@commby{(Communicated by #1)}}
+%<amsart>\let\@commby=\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We handle translator names like author names, just in case there is
+%    more than one translator. [mjd,1994/10/19]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\translname{Translated by}
+\def\translator#1{%
+  \ifx\@empty\@translators \def\@translators{#1}%
+  \else\g@addto@macro\@translators{\and#1}\fi}
+\let\@translators=\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\@settranslators{\par\begingroup
+  \addvspace{6\p@\@plus9\p@}%
+  \hbox to\columnwidth{\hss\normalfont\normalsize
+    \translname{ }%
+    \andify\@translators \uppercasenonmath\@translators
+    \@translators}
+  \endgroup
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The general function to convert a list of items in the form
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% A\and B\and C\and D
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    to the form `A, B, C, and D' is \cs{xandlist}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \xandlist{, }{ and }{, and }{A\and B\and C\and D}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    This is a completely expandable macro, with the return value being
+%    the converted list. There is also a `no-execute' version whose
+%    fourth argument should be a macro; the text to be converted will be
+%    taken from that macro and after conversion will be put back as the
+%    macro's new replacement text.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%      \nxandlist{, }{ and }{, and }\result
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    I don't think I want to explain this except by recommending that
+%    you watch it in operation with \cs{tracingmacros} if you're
+%    interested. [mjd,1994/10/19]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\xandlist}[4]{\@andlista{{#1}{#2}{#3}}#4\and\and}
+\def\@andlista#1#2\and#3\and{\@andlistc{#2}\@ifnotempty{#3}{%
+  \@andlistb#1{#3}}}
+\def\@andlistb#1#2#3#4#5\and{%
+  \@ifempty{#5}{%
+    \@andlistc{#2#4}%
+  }{%
+    \@andlistc{#1#4}\@andlistb{#1}{#3}{#3}{#5}%
+  }}
+\let\@andlistc\@iden
+\newcommand{\nxandlist}[4]{%
+  \def\@andlistc##1{\toks@\@xp{\the\toks@##1}}%
+  \toks@{\toks@\@emptytoks \@andlista{{#1}{#2}{#3}}}%
+  \the\@xp\toks@#4\and\and
+  \edef#4{\the\toks@}%
+  \let\@andlistc\@iden}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{andify}
+%
+%    The \cs{andify} function is provided as a convenient abbreviation
+%    for the most common case.  See also \cs{author@andify} (for
+%    \cls{amsart} and \cls{amsproc} only), which gives better results
+%    in cases with a large number of authors.  Provide a substitutable
+%    text string to simplify language-specific modifications.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@@and{and}
+\newcommand{\andify}{%
+  \nxandlist{\unskip, }{\unskip{} \@@and~}{\unskip, \@@and~}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Override the funny default definition of \cn{and} from \latex/.
+%    This is not actually used by AMS classes, however.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\and{\unskip{ }\@@and{ }\ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{maketitle}
+%
+%    Set up the style of an article opening page.  For books, see below.
+%    For articles, we must add the copyright info footnote.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\maketitle{\par
+  \@topnum\z@ % this prevents figures from falling at the top of page 1
+  \@setcopyright
+  \thispagestyle{firstpage}% this sets first page specifications
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Do some setup for the running heads here. If there are no author names,
+%    we set the left-hand running head to the value of the right-hand running
+%    head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \uppercasenonmath\shorttitle
+  \ifx\@empty\shortauthors \let\shortauthors\shorttitle
+  \else \andify\shortauthors
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following hook is used to activate the writing of author and
+%    title information to an `issue table of contents' when multiple
+%    articles are being processed for a journal issue or a proceedings
+%    volume.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@maketitle@hook
+  \begingroup
+  \@maketitle
+  \toks@\@xp{\shortauthors}\@temptokena\@xp{\shorttitle}%
+  \toks4{\def\\{ \ignorespaces}}% defend against questionable usage
+  \edef\@tempa{%
+    \@nx\markboth{\the\toks4
+      \@nx\MakeUppercase{\the\toks@}}{\the\@temptokena}}%
+  \@tempa
+  \endgroup
+  \c@footnote\z@
+  \@cleartopmattertags
+}
+\def\@cleartopmattertags{%
+  \def\do##1{\let##1\relax}%
+  \do\maketitle \do\@maketitle \do\title \do\@xtitle \do\@title
+  \do\author \do\@xauthor \do\address \do\@xaddress
+  \do\contrib \do\contribs \do\xcontribs \do\toccontribs
+  \do\email \do\@xemail \do\curraddr \do\@xcurraddr
+%<amsart>  \do\commby \do\@commby
+  \do\dedicatory \do\@dedicatory \do\thanks \do\thankses
+  \do\keywords \do\@keywords \do\subjclass \do\@subjclass
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    The hook \cs{@maketitle@hook} is placed into \cn{maketitle} rather
+%    than \cs{@maketitle} because the latter tends to get redefined by
+%    derived classes using this one as a base. The initial motivation
+%    for this hook is to extract title and author information to an
+%    external file, so we can't do it with \cs{AtBeginDocument}:
+%    \cn{title} and \cn{author} commands might occur between
+%    \verb'\begin{document}' and \cn{maketitle}.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\@maketitle@hook{\global\let\@maketitle@hook\@empty}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Set up the style of an article opening page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\@maketitle{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Set font to normal, just in case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \normalfont\normalsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Special footnotes are put here to ensure that they come first at
+%    the bottom of the page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@adminfootnotes
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If |\pagestyle{myheadings}| was specified, \cs{@mkboth} will be a no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@mkboth{\@nx\shortauthors}{\@nx\shorttitle}%
+%<amsproc>  \global\topskip8pc\relax % 10pc to base of first title line
+%<amsart>  \global\topskip42\p@\relax % 5.5pc   "   "   "     "     "
+  \@settitle
+  \ifx\@empty\authors \else \@setauthors \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Likewise with \cs{@dedicatory} and \cs{@date}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\@empty\@dedicatory
+  \else
+%<amsproc>    \baselineskip26\p@
+%<amsart>    \baselineskip18\p@
+    \vtop{\centering{\footnotesize\itshape\@dedicatory\@@par}%
+      \global\dimen@i\prevdepth}\prevdepth\dimen@i
+  \fi
+  \@setabstract
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Space before the main text should be 32 + 14 base-to-base; we
+%    accomplish this by doing a vskip of that amount with \cs{baselineskip}
+%    subtracted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \normalsize
+  \if@titlepage
+    \newpage
+  \else
+    \dimen@34\p@ \advance\dimen@-\baselineskip
+    \vskip\dimen@\relax
+  \fi
+} % end \@maketitle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Segregate the definitions of administrative footnotes to permit
+%    easier customization, especially for translation journals.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@adminfootnotes{%
+  \let\@makefnmark\relax  \let\@thefnmark\relax
+%<amsart>  \ifx\@empty\@date\else \@footnotetext{\@setdate}\fi
+  \ifx\@empty\@subjclass\else \@footnotetext{\@setsubjclass}\fi
+  \ifx\@empty\@keywords\else \@footnotetext{\@setkeywords}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In order to make multiple thanks footnotes work inside a single
+%    \cs{@footnotetext} argument we need to make the first \cn{par} be
+%    ignored. Cf.~\cs{@setthanks}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\@empty\thankses\else \@footnotetext{%
+    \def\par{\let\par\@par}\@setthanks}%
+  \fi
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Journal/series logo for articles}
+%
+%    \cs{publname} either will be defined by a parent class that is calling
+%    \cls{amsart} or \cls{amsproc} as a base class, or will be absent, in
+%    which case this can be used as a signal to omit the \cs{@serieslogo}.
+%    A typical value for \cs{publname} would be
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \def\publname{JOURNAL OF THE\newline
+%   AMERICAN MATHEMATICAL SOCIETY}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    Initialize \cs{publname} and \cs{@serieslogo} to no-op if
+%    \cs{publname} is not already defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{publname}{%
+    \let\publname\@empty
+    \let\@serieslogo\@empty
+  }{%
+%<amsart>    \def\@serieslogo{\article@logo}%
+%<amsproc>    \def\@serieslogo{\procart@logo}%
+  }%
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cs{number} prefix on current issue is to work around
+%    inconsistencies in the form of issue numbers as passed in from
+%    system level. Sometimes they will get passed in with a leading
+%    zero, which we don't want to print if it happens to occur.
+%    The |0| prevents an error if \cs{currentissue} happens to be empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{volinfo}{%
+    \def\volinfo{%
+      Volume \currentvolume, Number \number0\currentissue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Month/year is not included initially when a journal article is
+%    posted on the WWW prior to print publication.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \if\@printyear , \currentmonth\ \currentyear\fi
+    }%
+  }{}%
+}
+\def\@printyear{TF}% boolean false
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsproc>
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{volinfo}{\let\volinfo\@empty}{}
+}
+%</amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Default values for information such as volume, year, and so on are
+%    provided as follows.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\issueinfo#1#2#3#4{\def\currentvolume{#1}\def\currentissue{#2}%
+  \def\currentmonth{#3}\def\currentyear{#4}}
+\issueinfo{00}% volume number
+  {0}%        % issue number
+  {Xxxx}%     % month
+  {XXXX}%     % year
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Copyright year may be different from issue year. Allow it to be
+%    specified separately. It is probably more natural anyway, from the
+%    user's perspective, to give the copyright year in the same command
+%    when giving the name of the copyright holder.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\copyrightinfo}[2]{%
+  \def\copyrightyear{#1}%
+  \@ifnotempty{#2}{\def\copyrightholder{#2}}%
+}
+\copyrightinfo{0000}{(copyright holder)}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Provide page span information. If negative number is given, convert
+%    to roman numeral form.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\pagespan#1#2{\setcounter{page}{#1}%
+  \ifnum\c@page<\z@ \pagenumbering{roman}\setcounter{page}{-#1}\fi
+  \def\start@page{#1}\def\end@page{#2}}
+\pagespan{000}{000}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Formatting for journal page numbers. [bnb, 1996/09/11]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifundefined{pageinfo}{%
+    \def\pageinfo{%
+      \ifnum\start@page=\z@
+        Pages 000--000
+      \else
+        \ifx\start@page\end@page
+          Page \start@page
+        \else
+          Pages \start@page--\end@page
+        \fi
+      \fi}%
+  }{}%
+}
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Publisher Item Identifier (we started using them in journal logos
+%    as of January 1997).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsart>\@ifundefined{ISSN}{\def\ISSN{0000-0000}}{}
+%<amsart>\newcommand\PII[1]{\def\@PII{#1}}
+%<amsart>\PII{S \ISSN(XX)0000-0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Copyright block}
+%
+%    Doing the copyright info on the first page is a little tricky. We
+%    want it to come at the bottom, after any footnotes and floating
+%    inserts, but before the page number. If we simply put it into
+%    \cs{@oddfoot} (in \cs{ps@plain}) its height will not be subtracted
+%    from the height of the text and then the page number will be lower
+%    than we want. So we do it as an insert.
+%
+%    Through version 1.2, this code was included only for \pkg{amsart}
+%    and \pkg{amsproc}; the formatting of some book series requires an
+%    insert at the bottom of the text block, so this code has been
+%    extended to all AMS document classes. [bnb, 1999/07/14]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newinsert\copyins
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We set the skip register associated with this insert to the
+%    \emph{base-to-base} distance from the bottom of the page contents
+%    to the base of the first line in the copyright info. See the
+%    definition of \cs{@setcopyright}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\skip\copyins=1.5pc
+\count\copyins=1000 % magnification factor, 1000 = 100%
+\dimen\copyins=.5\textheight % maximum allowed per page
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cn{copyins} is ignored if a float is input on the first page;
+%    adding it to \cs{@reinserts} will make the output routine behave.
+%    [bnb; 2004/06/09; B-365]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\g@addto@macro\@reinserts{%
+  \ifvoid\copyins\else\insert\copyins{\unvbox\copyins}\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Put the contents into a \tex/ insert. This information is omitted
+%    unless \cs{@serieslogo} is non-null. In other words it will
+%    normally not print except when an AMS publication-specific document
+%    class such as \cls{tran-l} is used.
+%    And even if the series logo is printed, omit the copyright line
+%    if requested by |\coprightinfo{}{}|.  [bnb, 1996/10/17]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@copyinsfontsize{\fontsize{6}{7\p@}\normalfont\upshape}
+\newif\if@extracrline  \@extracrlinefalse
+\let\@extracrline\@empty
+\relax
+\def\@setcopyright{%
+  \ifx\@empty\@serieslogo
+  \else\ifx\@empty\copyrightyear
+  \else
+    \insert\copyins{\hsize\textwidth
+      \parfillskip\z@\relax
+      \leftskip\z@\@plus.9\textwidth\relax \rightskip\z@\relax
+      \@copyinsfontsize
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The spacing between the preceding text and the copyright info is
+%    done with a strut of height |\skip\copyins|. (Note that
+%    \cs{lineskip} and \cs{baselineskip} are 0 in the \latex/ output
+%    routine.) The negative vskip gives an effective distance of 0 from
+%    the top of the box to the base of the first line (assuming
+%    |\skip\copyins| is greater than the height of that line). Then the
+%    apparent total height of the box will work well with \tex/'s
+%    calculations involving |\skip\copyins| for how much room to leave
+%    for this object.  An extra 6pt is allowed when an additional line
+%    is present; this adjustment was found adequate in some borderline
+%    cases where tight pages reset with the additional line had text
+%    lines moved to the next page, causing the paper length to expand
+%    by a page.  [bnb, 2004/05/07-06/24]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \everypar{}%
+      \vskip-\skip\copyins
+      \if@extracrline
+        \vskip-6pt
+      \fi
+      \nointerlineskip
+      \leavevmode\hfill\vrule\@width\z@\@height\skip\copyins
+      \copyright\copyrightyear\ \copyrightholder\ignorespaces
+      \if@extracrline \@extracrline \fi
+      \par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This kern of 0pt forces the depth of the last line (if any) to be
+%    added to the height of the box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \kern\z@}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    When \cs{@combinefloats} is called, the box \cs{@outputbox} already
+%    contains the main text of the page and any footnotes. Then \latex/
+%    adds top and bottom figures. We want to add our copyright info at
+%    the very bottom, but still inside of the vbox.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@combinefloats{%
+  \ifx \@toplist\@empty \else \@cflt \fi
+  \ifx \@botlist\@empty \else \@cflb \fi
+  \ifvoid\copyins \else \@cflci \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \subsubsection{combine-floats-copyright-insert}
+%
+%    In the twocolumn/firstcolumn case, postpone adding the drop folio.
+%    Put an empty box of the same height at the bottom of the left-hand
+%    column to make the columns balance.  Allow a smidge of stretch in
+%    case the first page of a chapter has no internal stretch, so that
+%    the drop folio will be flush to the bottom of the text block;
+%    don't do this for a twocolumn page, to avoid an uneven bottom.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@cflci{%
+  \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@outputbox
+    \vskip\skip\copyins
+    \if@twocolumn \else \vskip\z@ plus\p@ \fi
+    \hbox to\columnwidth{%
+      \hss\vbox to\z@{\vss
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In two-column layout, put an empty box in the first column
+%    instead of the drop folio.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \if@twocolumn
+          \if@firstcolumn \else \unvbox\copyins \fi
+        \else
+          \unvbox\copyins
+        \fi
+        }}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now redo the insert to make sure we get the right amount of space
+%    reserved for it in the second column.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if@twocolumn \if@firstcolumn
+    \insert\copyins{\unvbox\copyins}%
+  \fi\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Reset the \cs{copyins} flag so that a subsequent insert
+%    (e.g.\ \cs{@dropfolio} in some book series) will work.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\count\copyins=999 \relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    [End of code to support inserts at end of text block.]
+%
+%    For journals only, provide a switch that indicates the author has
+%    agreed to revert copyright to the public domain; this results in
+%    an addition to the copyright block on the article.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart>
+\newif\if@revertcopyright  \@revertcopyrightfalse
+\newcommand{\revertcopyright}{%
+  \global\@revertcopyrighttrue
+  \global\@extracrlinetrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add notation regarding reversion of copyright to public domain if
+%    author has agreed to it.  Permit this to be set in a different
+%    size than the copyright line (required for some author packages).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@revertcrfontsize{\fontsize{6}{7\p@}\normalfont\upshape}
+\def\@extracrline{%
+  \if@revertcopyright
+    \unskip\\
+    \@revertcrfontsize
+    Reverts to public domain 28 years from publication
+  \fi
+}
+%</amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Other top matter info}
+%
+%    Some name setup.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\abstractname}{Abstract}
+\newcommand{\keywordsname}{Key words and phrases}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For now, support just the two most recent versions; earlier versions
+%    were:
+%    \begin{itemize}
+%    \item \textup{1980} Mathematics Subject Classification
+%    \item \textup{1980} Mathematics Subject Classification
+%          \textup{(1985} Revision\textup{)}
+%    \end{itemize}
+%    Default to the 1991 edition, as that's what is in production at the
+%    time this change is made.  [bnb, 1999/04/30]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\subjclassname}{%
+  \textup{1991} Mathematics Subject Classification}
+\@xp\let\csname subjclassname@1991\endcsname \subjclassname
+\@namedef{subjclassname@2000}{%
+  \textup{2000} Mathematics Subject Classification}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For the date we have a special little problem: We only want to add
+%    the `Received by the editors' text for publication-specific
+%    document classes such as \cls{tran-l}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsbook>\def\@tempb{amsbook}
+%<amsproc>\def\@tempb{amsproc}
+%<amsart>\def\@tempb{amsart}
+\ifx\@classname\@tempb
+  \newcommand{\datename}{\textit{Date}:}
+\else
+  \newcommand{\datename}{Received by the editors}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\@settitle{\begin{center}%
+%<amsart>  \baselineskip14\p@\relax
+%<amsproc> \Large
+    \bfseries
+%<amsart>\uppercasenonmath\@title
+  \@title
+  \end{center}%
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    For multiple authors we need to combine the author names into a
+%    list of the form Author One, Author Two, \dots, and Author Last.
+%    Change line breaking penalties to avoid a line break in the middle of
+%    an author name if there are a lot of authors. This should probably
+%    better be done by changing spaces within author names to
+%    |\nolinebreak[3]\space|, but that would take more work.
+%    [mjd,2000/12/27]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\author@andify{%
+  \nxandlist {\unskip ,\penalty-1 \space\ignorespaces}%
+    {\unskip {} \@@and~}%
+    {\unskip ,\penalty-2 \space \@@and~}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setauthors{%
+  \begingroup
+  \def\thanks{\protect\thanks@warning}%
+  \trivlist
+%<amsart>  \centering\footnotesize \@topsep30\p@\relax
+%<amsart>  \advance\@topsep by -\baselineskip
+%<amsproc>  \centering \fontsize{11}{13\p@}\selectfont\@topsep13\p@\relax
+  \item\relax
+  \author@andify\authors
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Make dbl-backslash robust to prevent problems if/when
+%    \cs{MakeTextUppercase} expansion is applied.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\\{\protect\linebreak}%
+%<amsart>  \MakeUppercase{\authors}%
+%<amsproc>  \authors
+  \ifx\@empty\contribs
+  \else
+    ,\penalty-3 \space \@setcontribs
+    \@closetoccontribs
+  \fi
+  \endtrivlist
+  \endgroup
+}
+\def\@closetoccontribs{}
+\def\@setcontribs{%
+  \@xcontribs
+%<amsart>  \MakeUppercase{\xcontribs}%
+%<amsproc>  \xcontribs
+}
+\def\@setdate{\datename\ \@date\@addpunct.}
+\def\@setsubjclass{%
+  {\itshape\subjclassname.}\enspace\@subjclass\@addpunct.}
+\def\@setkeywords{%
+  {\itshape \keywordsname.}\enspace \@keywords\@addpunct.}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The following definitions suffice for all the AMS document classes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setthanks{\def\thanks##1{\par##1\@addpunct.}\thankses}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    `Abstract' can be changed to, say, `R\'esum\'e' (French) by
+%    redefining \cn{abstractname}. This and other control sequence names
+%    (\cn{refname}, \cn{contentsname}, \cn{appendixname}, and so on) are
+%    compatible with the \pkg{babel} package (the AMS sometimes
+%    publishes articles in languages other than English.)
+%
+%    In AMS document classes, the abstract should be placed before
+%    \cn{maketitle} (otherwise the desired ordering of frontmatter
+%    elements cannot be ensured in all cases).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newbox\abstractbox
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We start by checking whether \cn{maketitle} has already been used
+%    (in which case it was reset to \cs{relax}); if so, we give a
+%    warning that the abstract should be placed before \cn{maketitle}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{abstract}{%
+  \ifx\maketitle\relax
+    \ClassWarning{\@classname}{Abstract should precede
+      \protect\maketitle\space in AMS document classes; reported}%
+  \fi
+  \global\setbox\abstractbox=\vtop \bgroup
+    \normalfont\Small
+    \list{}{\labelwidth\z@
+      \leftmargin3pc \rightmargin\leftmargin
+      \listparindent\normalparindent \itemindent\z@
+      \parsep\z@ \@plus\p@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In order to get equation numbers indented with the rest of the
+%    abstract, we have to do this:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \let\fullwidthdisplay\relax
+    }%
+    \item[\hskip\labelsep\scshape\abstractname.]%
+}{%
+  \endlist\egroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the abstract was supposed to be typeset earlier, then
+%    \cs{@setabstract} is now equal to \cs{relax}, and we had better
+%    drop the contents of the abstract box onto the page immediately, to
+%    salvage the situation as best we can.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\@setabstract\relax \@setabstracta \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Because the abstract might be postponed until the end of an
+%    article, we cannot simply use the fact of a preceding
+%    \cn{maketitle} to tell whether \cs{endabstract} should immediately
+%    put the abstract box contents on the page. So we use an auxiliary
+%    function that will be reset to no-op once we have passed the point
+%    where the abstract should normally be typeset.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@setabstract{\@setabstracta \global\let\@setabstract\relax}
+\def\@setabstracta{%
+  \ifvoid\abstractbox
+  \else
+    \skip@20\p@ \advance\skip@-\lastskip
+    \advance\skip@-\baselineskip \vskip\skip@
+    \box\abstractbox
+    \prevdepth\z@ % because \abstractbox is a vtop
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Title page environment does nothing much; information and
+%    formatting to be provided by the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\titlepage{%
+%<amsbook>  \cleardoublepage
+%<amsart|amsproc>  \clearpage
+  \thispagestyle{empty}\setcounter{page}{0}}
+\def\endtitlepage{\newpage}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Macros for list labels}
+%
+%    Through version 1.2, first-level enumerated item labels were formatted
+%    with a following period, which is not AMS style.  Effective with
+%    version 2.0 these labels are formatted with parentheses.  Anyone
+%    requiring the period style will have to redefine \cs{labelenumi}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelenumi{(\theenumi)}
+\def\theenumi{\@arabic\c@enumi}
+\def\labelenumii{(\theenumii)}
+\def\theenumii{\@alph\c@enumii}
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\def\labelenumiii{(\theenumiii)}
+\def\theenumiii{\@roman\c@enumiii}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\def\labelenumiv{(\theenumiv)}
+\def\theenumiv{\@Alph\c@enumiv}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\labelitemi{$\m@th\bullet$}
+\def\labelitemii{\bfseries --}% \upshape already done by \itemize
+\def\labelitemiii{$\m@th\ast$}
+\def\labelitemiv{$\m@th\cdot$}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Verse and quotation environments}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\\@centercr
+  \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em\listparindent\itemindent
+  \rightmargin\leftmargin \advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item[]%
+}{%
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\endverse=\endlist % for efficiency
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The left/right margins of the quotation environment are supposed to
+%    be the same as for the abstract environment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{%
+    \leftmargin3pc \listparindent\normalparindent
+    \itemindent\z@
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep\z@ \@plus\p@}%
+  \item[]%
+}{%
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\endquotation=\endlist % for efficiency
+\newenvironment{quote}{%
+  \list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[]%
+}{%
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\endquote=\endlist % for efficiency
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{List environments}
+%    Changed definition of \cs{trivlist}, \env{enumerate}, and
+%    \env{itemize} in order to have \cn{makelabel} apply \cn{upshape}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\trivlist{\parsep\parskip\@nmbrlistfalse
+  \@trivlist \labelwidth\z@ \leftmargin\z@
+  \itemindent\z@
+  \let\@itemlabel\@empty
+  \def\makelabel##1{\upshape##1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{enumerate}{%
+  \ifnum \@enumdepth >3 \@toodeep\else
+      \advance\@enumdepth \@ne
+      \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}\list
+      {\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter
+        {\@enumctr}\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{\upshape##1}}}\fi
+}{%
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\endenumerate=\endlist % for efficiency
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{itemize}{%
+  \ifnum\@itemdepth>3 \@toodeep
+  \else \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+    \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}%
+      {\def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{\upshape##1}}}%
+  \fi
+}{%
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\enditemize=\endlist % for efficiency
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\descriptionlabel}[1]{\hspace\labelsep \upshape\bfseries #1:}
+\newenvironment{description}{\list{}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Adjust the indent of the first line to the desired value:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \advance\leftmargini6\p@ \itemindent-12\p@
+  \labelwidth\z@ \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}%
+}{
+  \endlist
+}
+\let\enddescription=\endlist % for efficiency
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\upn}
+%    The command \cn{upn} can be used to force upright font for
+%    punctuation or digits in italic text. For example
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% ... as numbered by \upn{``A''} or \upn{``1''} hereafter\upn{)}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\upn=\textup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Since these margin settings are dependent on the fonts used, we
+%    postpone them until begin-document. (This means that we cannot use
+%    the values directly for calculations before begin-document.)  Allow
+%    for a reasonable maximum value; 13 = xiii = m should be adequate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \labelsep=5pt\relax
+  \setcounter{enumi}{13}\setcounter{enumii}{13}%
+  \setcounter{enumiii}{13}\setcounter{enumiv}{13}%
+  \settowidth\leftmargini{\labelenumi\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \advance\leftmargini by \normalparindent
+  \settowidth\leftmarginii{\labelenumii\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \settowidth\leftmarginiii{\labelenumiii\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \settowidth\leftmarginiv{\labelenumiv\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \setcounter{enumi}{0}\setcounter{enumii}{0}%
+  \setcounter{enumiii}{0}\setcounter{enumiv}{0}%
+  \leftmarginv=10pt  \leftmarginvi=\leftmarginv
+  \leftmargin=\leftmargini
+  \labelwidth=\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \@listi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In some contexts the space above/below lists needs to be
+%    suppressed. So we put it into a variable \cs{listisep}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\listisep
+\listisep\smallskipamount
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini \parsep\z@skip
+  \topsep\listisep \itemsep\z@skip
+  \listparindent\normalparindent}
+\let\@listi\@listI
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Is it necessary to reset \cs{parsep}, \cs{partopsep}, \cs{itemsep}
+%    to their default values (0) in each of the subordinate list
+%    setup functions? I don't believe so, but I leave the settings in
+%    the listii function just in case some unusual nesting of
+%    environments might cause trouble. [mjd,1994/09/22]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep\z@skip \parsep\z@skip \partopsep\z@skip \itemsep\z@skip}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginv \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginvi \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Fleqn option}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifclasswith{\@classname}{fleqn}{%
+  \let\@tempa\@iden
+  \AtBeginDocument{\mathindent\leftmargini}%
+}{\let\@tempa\@gobble}%
+\@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{\let\@tempa\@gobble}{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{amstex}{\let\@tempa\@gobble}{}%
+}
+\@tempa{%
+  \def\[{\relax
+    \ifmmode\@badmath
+    \else
+      \begin{trivlist}%
+      \@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+      \@endparpenalty\postdisplaypenalty
+      \item[]\leavevmode
+      \hbox to\linewidth\bgroup$\displaystyle
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Note that the \cs{m@th} should go at the end in \cn{]} just in
+%    case an embedded small math formula inside \cn{text} occurs in
+%    the display.
+%
+%    Why the extra bgroup here? I think it's not needed.
+%    [mjd,3-Feb-1994]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \hskip\mathindent\bgroup
+    \fi}%
+  \def\]{\relax
+    \ifmmode
+      \egroup \m@th$\hfil \egroup
+      \end{trivlist}%
+    \else \@badmath
+    \fi}%
+  \renewenvironment{equation}{%
+    \@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty
+    \@endparpenalty\postdisplaypenalty
+    \refstepcounter{equation}%
+    \@topsep\abovedisplayskip \trivlist
+    \item[]\leavevmode
+    \hbox to\linewidth\bgroup\hskip\mathindent$\displaystyle
+  }{%
+    \m@th$\hfil \displaywidth\linewidth \hbox{\@eqnnum}\egroup
+    \endtrivlist
+  }%
+  \renewenvironment{eqnarray}{%
+    \stepcounter{equation}\let\@currentlabel\theequation
+    \global\@eqnswtrue \global\@eqcnt\z@ \tabskip\mathindent
+    \let\\=\@eqncr \abovedisplayskip\topsep
+    \ifvmode \advance\abovedisplayskip\partopsep \fi
+    \belowdisplayskip\abovedisplayskip
+    \belowdisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
+    \abovedisplayshortskip\abovedisplayskip
+    $$\everycr{}\halign to\linewidth\bgroup
+      \hskip\@centering
+      $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@skip####\m@th$&%
+      \@eqnsel \global\@eqcnt\@ne
+      \hfil${}####{}\m@th$\hfil&%
+      \global\@eqcnt\tw@
+      $\displaystyle ####\m@th$\hfil\tabskip\@centering&%
+      \global\@eqcnt\thr@@
+      \hbox to \z@\bgroup\hss####\egroup\tabskip\z@skip\cr
+    }{%
+      \@@eqncr \egroup \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne$$%
+      \global\@ignoretrue
+    }%
+  \newdimen\mathindent
+  \mathindent\leftmargini
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Redefined internal sectioning commands}
+%
+%    In amsart.sty \cs{@startsection}, \cs{@sect},
+%    and a couple of other things are redefined to fix a few hard-coded
+%    things that would interfere with the desired style.  The most
+%    noteworthy difference is that all section headings will go into the
+%    table of contents (governed by secnumdepth as usual), EVEN WHEN THE
+%    |*| FORM IS USED.  The only section heading not listed in the table of
+%    contents is the heading for the toc itself.
+%
+%    A second major departure from standard \latex/ is that when a
+%    short form of a section title is given, it is used only for the
+%    running heads; the table of contents still gets the full version of
+%    the title. This is correct for AMS editorial practice. However if
+%    one wants to get a line break into the table of contents it means
+%    that the standard \latex/ method cannot be used. See the
+%    \cn{except} and \cn{for} commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Section titles, if they are run-in with the following text, are
+%    stored in a box instead of being typeset right away.  They will be
+%    typeset by \cs{everypar}, but if one section heading follows
+%    right after another, this won't happen.  So by doing
+%    \cs{leavevmode} we force this to happen.  (\cs{if@noskipsec}
+%    is true if the previous section title has not yet been typeset.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+ \if@noskipsec \leavevmode \fi
+ \par \@tempskipa #4\relax
+ \@afterindenttrue
+ \ifdim \@tempskipa <\z@ \@tempskipa -\@tempskipa \@afterindentfalse\fi
+ \if@nobreak \everypar{}\else
+     \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace\@tempskipa\fi
+%    Don't call \@ssect in the ifstar case:
+ \@ifstar{\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{\@m}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+         {\@dblarg{\@sect{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We add \cn{textup} here in order to make section
+%    numbers always roman, even if the rest of the section head is
+%    italic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@seccntformat#1{%
+  \protect\textup{\protect\@secnumfont
+    \csname the#1\endcsname
+    \protect\@secnumpunct
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Some journals require a different font for section numbers. (As
+%    coded here, this option permits only a change of weight, to
+%    \cn{bfseries}.)  The \cls{amsart} font is checked again later,
+%    when processing \cn{section}, and if there is no section title,
+%    it is made bold.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsbook|amsproc>\let\@secnumfont\@empty
+%<amsart>\def\@secnumfont{\mdseries}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%     For reference, here is the argument list for \cs{@sect}.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% % #1    #2     #3      #4          #5         #6     #7      #8
+% {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}[SHORTT]{TITLE}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \cs{@toclevel} for for \cs{@tocwrite} (to
+%    \cs{@tochangmeasure}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\@toclevel{\ifnum#2=\@m 0\else\number#2\fi}%
+  \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \let\@secnumber\@empty
+  \else \@xp\let\@xp\@secnumber\csname the#1\endcsname\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the value of afterskip $>0$, then this is not a run-in section
+%    heading, and we want to suppress final punctuation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@tempskipa #5\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{@svsec} will be the section number plus some formatting if
+%    the star form was not used and if the depth of numbering extends to
+%    the current level. The user can change secnumdepth to control how
+%    many levels of sectioning will be numbered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+    \let\@svsec\@empty
+  \else
+    \refstepcounter{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the section heading is not run-in and there is no title, omit
+%    final punctuation and space.  If it is run-in, omit extra space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\@secnumpunct{%
+      \ifdim\@tempskipa>\z@ % not a run-in section heading
+        \@ifnotempty{#8}{.\@nx\enspace}%
+      \else
+        \@ifempty{#8}{.}{.\@nx\enspace}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For \cls{amsart}, if a subsection has no title, make the section
+%    number bold; otherwise leave it alone.
+%    [bnb; 2004/06/08; per vwa, B-442]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsart>    \@ifempty{#8}{%
+%<amsart>      \ifnum #2=\tw@ \def\@secnumfont{\bfseries}\fi}{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If the |*|-form was not used (\arg{2} less than 1000), we add
+%    \cn{sectionname} or whatever as a prefix, separated by a space.
+%    We need the ifundefined test in order to know whether the space
+%    should be added or not.  There must be a better way to do this
+%    but I haven't thought of it yet.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \protected@edef\@svsec{%
+      \ifnum#2<\@m
+        \@ifundefined{#1name}{}{%
+          \ignorespaces\csname #1name\endcsname\space
+        }%
+      \fi
+      \@seccntformat{#1}%
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ % then this is not a run-in section heading
+    \begingroup #6\relax
+    \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty\@M #8\par}%
+    \endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Section headings don't set marks for the running heads in the article
+%    style, only in the amsbook style. Assumption: \cs{sectionmark} is
+%    defined to call \cs{@secnumber} as its penultimate argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsbook>  \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \arg{2} (level) is greater than 1000 then we don't do a table
+%    of contents entry. This happens only for the section heading above
+%    the table of contents itself.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum#2>\@m \else \@tocwrite{#1}{#8}\fi
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Otherwise we're doing a run-in heading; it is stored as \cs{@svsechd},
+%    which will be typeset by \cs{everypar} as soon as some text is
+%    encountered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@svsechd{#6\hskip #3\@svsec
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To allow for the possibility that the user wants an empty section
+%    title, leaving just the section number, we check whether \arg{8}
+%    is nonempty before adding the period.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifnotempty{#8}{\ignorespaces#8\unskip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The following test is to prevent a period being added if the
+%    section title ended in a question mark or other punctuation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+       \@addpunct.}%
+    \ifnum#2>\@m \else \@tocwrite{#1}{#8}\fi
+  }%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In a previous version of \cls{amsart} \cs{@nobreaktrue} was added to
+%    \cs{@xsect} for some reason. Let's keep that just in case it was done to
+%    prevent a certain kind of bug. [mjd,17-Aug-1994]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \global\@nobreaktrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{@xsect} does some more stuff based on whether this is a run-in
+%    heading or not.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@xsect{#5}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Undefine \cs{@ssect} to save memory; it's not needed in \cls{amsart}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@ssect\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Chapters and sections}
+%    Allocate counters for sectioning commands. Paragraph and subparagraph
+%    counters are allocated but normally not used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcounter{part}
+%<amsbook>\newcounter{chapter}
+%<amsproc|amsart>\newcounter{section}
+%<amsbook>\newcounter{section}[chapter]
+%<amsbook>\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
+\newcounter{subparagraph}[paragraph]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Set numbering style for sectioning commands. In a couple of cases
+%    resetting is unnecessary but we include the full list here for
+%    completeness.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\thepart          {\arabic{part}}
+%<amsbook>\renewcommand\thechapter       {\arabic{chapter}}
+\renewcommand\thesection       {\arabic{section}}
+\renewcommand\thesubsection    {\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
+\renewcommand\thesubsubsection {\thesubsection .\arabic{subsubsection}}
+\renewcommand\theparagraph     {\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
+\renewcommand\thesubparagraph  {\theparagraph.\arabic{subparagraph}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Depth of section numbering; if \fn{secnumdepth} were 2 instead of
+%    3, \cn{subsubsection} would not be numbered.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The arguments of \cs{@startsection} are given for reference:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% % #1    #2     #3      #4          #5         #6
+% {NAME}{LEVEL}{INDENT}{BEFORESKIP}{AFTERSKIP}{STYLE}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\partname{Part}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\part{\@startsection{part}{0}%
+  \z@{\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}{.5\linespacing}%
+  {\normalfont\bfseries\raggedright}}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Specialsection correlates to our inhouse Z-head.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\specialsection{\@startsection{section}{1}%
+%<amsart>  \z@{\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}{.5\linespacing}%
+%<amsproc|amsbook>  \z@{2\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}{.5\linespacing}%
+%<amsart>  {\normalfont\centering}}
+%<amsproc|amsbook>  {\large\scshape\centering}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In the book class \cn{part} puts the part title on a separate
+%    page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\part{\cleardoublepage \thispagestyle{empty}%
+  \null\vfil  \markboth{}{}\secdef\@part\@spart}
+%
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax \refstepcounter{part}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\partname\ \thepart.
+        \protect\enspace\protect\noindent#1}%
+  \else
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi
+  \begingroup\centering
+  \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+       {\fontsize{\@xviipt}{22}\bfseries
+         \partname\ \thepart} \vskip 20\p@ \fi
+  \fontsize{\@xxpt}{25}\bfseries
+      #1\vfil\vfil\endgroup \newpage\thispagestyle{empty}}
+
+\def\@spart#1{\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\noindent#1}%
+  \begingroup\centering
+  \fontsize{\@xxpt}{25}\bfseries
+     #1\vfil\vfil\endgroup \newpage\thispagestyle{empty}}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The arguments of \cs{partrunhead} are \cs{partname},
+%    \cs{thepart}, and the text of the part title. The first two were
+%    fully expanded during the marking process. Use of a mere
+%    interword space between the first two args makes it possible
+%    to apply \cn{ignorespaces} and \cn{unskip} as shown here
+%    to produce the desired results if one or the other is empty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\partrunhead#1#2#3{%
+  \@ifnotempty{#2}{\uppercase{\ignorespaces#1 #2\unskip}\@ifnotempty{#3}{. }}%
+  \def\@tempa{#3}%
+  \ifx\@empty\@tempa\else
+    \begingroup \def\\{ \ignorespaces}% defend against questionable usage
+    \uppercasenonmath\@tempa\@tempa
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+\let\chapterrunhead\partrunhead
+\let\sectionrunhead\partrunhead
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Section headings in the amsbook style differ from the amsart
+%    style in a couple of ways: The ones that aren't centered are
+%    indented on the left, instead of flush left; and the first
+%    level, \cn{section}, is not small caps but bold.
+%    Cf.~the definition of \cn{appendix}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}%
+  \z@{.7\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}{.5\linespacing}%
+%<amsart>  {\normalfont\scshape\centering}}
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  {\normalfont\bfseries\centering}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Negative value for \arg{5} is a signal to make a run-in heading instead
+%    of doing a vskip after the heading.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}%
+%<amsart>  \z@{.5\linespacing\@plus.7\linespacing}{-.5em}%
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \normalparindent{.5\linespacing\@plus.7\linespacing}{-.5em}%
+  {\normalfont\bfseries}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}%
+%<amsart>  \z@{.5\linespacing\@plus.7\linespacing}{-.5em}%
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \normalparindent\z@{-.5em}%
+  {\normalfont\itshape}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Fontdimen 2 of the current font is the ideal interword space of the
+%    font. Thus the following spec says that the space after the
+%    paragraph heading should be a normal interword space (but
+%    nonstretching and nonshrinking).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}%
+%<amsart>  \z@\z@{-\fontdimen2\font}%
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \normalparindent\z@{-\fontdimen2\font}%
+  \normalfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\subparagraph{\@startsection{subparagraph}{5}%
+  \z@\z@{-\fontdimen2\font}%
+  \normalfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\def\appendix{\par\c@section\z@ \c@subsection\z@
+   \let\sectionname\appendixname
+   \def\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}}
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    A slower, but fully expandable definition of \cs{@Roman} to avoid
+%    the nonexpandable \cn{uppercase} which is undesirable in certain
+%    circumstances.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@Roman#1{\@xp\@slowromancap
+  \romannumeral#1@}%
+%
+\def\@slowromancap#1{\ifx @#1% then terminate
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Note: \cs{if} is required here, not \cs{ifx}, because
+%    \cs{romannumeral} returns category 12 letters!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \if i#1I\else\if v#1V\else\if x#1X\else\if l#1L\else\if
+    c#1C\else\if m#1M\else#1\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \@xp\@slowromancap
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Book features}
+%    Books (monographs) comprise three distinct sections,
+%    \cn{frontmatter}, \cn{mainmatter}, and \cn{backmatter}.  The
+%    \cn{frontmatter} would consist of the title page, copyright page,
+%    table of contents, preface, etc.  The \cn{mainmatter} would
+%    be the body of the book.  The \cn{backmatter} would include the
+%    appendix, bibliography, glossary, and index.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\frontmatter{\cleardoublepage\pagenumbering{roman}}
+\def\mainmatter{\cleardoublepage\pagenumbering{arabic}}
+\def\backmatter{%
+  \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+  \let\chaptername\relax}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Book proceedings and monographs allow a signature to print at the
+%    end of a preface.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!amsart>
+\def\aufm#1{\par\vspace*{12pt}{\flushright #1\par}}
+%</!amsart>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Monographs can have a special exercise environment.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\newenvironment{xcb}{%
+  \setcounter{enumi}{0}%
+  \settowidth{\leftmargini}{\labelenumi\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \setcounter{enumii}{4}% letter d
+  \settowidth{\leftmarginii}{\labelenumii\hskip\labelsep}%
+  \@startsection{section}% counter name; ignored because of the
+                                % * below
+  {1}% sectioning level
+  {\z@}% indent to the left of the section title
+  {18\p@\@plus2\p@}% vertical space above
+  {1sp}% Space below of 13pt base-to-base, so none needs to be added
+      % here; but \z@ would cause the following text to be run-in, so we
+      % use 1sp instead.
+  {\bfseries}% The font of the subsection title
+  *% always unnumbered
+}{%
+  \par
+}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Book chapters}
+%    The \cn{chapter} command is provided only in the \cls{amsbook} class,
+%    not in \cls{amsart} or \cls{amsproc}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\chapter{%
+  \if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+  \thispagestyle{plain}\global\@topnum\z@
+  \@afterindenttrue \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{@chapter} for numbered chapters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\refstepcounter{chapter}%
+  \ifnum\c@secnumdepth<\z@ \let\@secnumber\@empty
+  \else \let\@secnumber\thechapter \fi
+  \typeout{\chaptername\space\@secnumber}%
+  \def\@toclevel{0}%
+  \ifx\chaptername\appendixname \@tocwriteb\tocappendix{chapter}{#2}%
+  \else \@tocwriteb\tocchapter{chapter}{#2}\fi
+  \chaptermark{#1}%
+  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+  \@makechapterhead{#2}\@afterheading}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{@schapter} for unnumbered chapters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@schapter#1{\typeout{#1}%
+  \let\@secnumber\@empty
+  \def\@toclevel{0}%
+  \ifx\chaptername\appendixname \@tocwriteb\tocappendix{chapter}{#1}%
+  \else \@tocwriteb\tocchapter{chapter}{#1}\fi
+  \chaptermark{#1}%
+  \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+  \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+  \@makeschapterhead{#1}\@afterheading}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\chaptername{Chapter}
+\newcommand\appendixname{Appendix}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{\global\topskip 7.5pc\relax
+  \begingroup
+  \fontsize{\@xivpt}{18}\bfseries\centering
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In order to keep the chapter number ``CHAPTER III'' from
+%    getting in the way of the \cs{topskip} we put it inside
+%    the paragraph containing the main title.  Then we have to
+%    do some laborious \cs{rlap}ing and \cs{hskip}ing to
+%    position it correctly.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\c@secnumdepth>\m@ne
+      \leavevmode \hskip-\leftskip
+      \rlap{\vbox to\z@{\vss
+          \centerline{\normalsize\mdseries
+              \uppercase\@xp{\chaptername}\enspace\thechapter}
+          \vskip 3pc}}\hskip\leftskip\fi
+     #1\par \endgroup
+  \skip@34\p@ \advance\skip@-\normalbaselineskip
+  \vskip\skip@ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{\global\topskip 7.5pc\relax
+  \begingroup
+  \fontsize{\@xivpt}{18}\bfseries\centering
+  #1\par \endgroup
+  \skip@34\p@ \advance\skip@-\normalbaselineskip
+  \vskip\skip@ }
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cn{appendix} command, following the \latex/ book, marks the
+%    start of a division after \cn{mainmatter} and before
+%    \cn{backmatter} that consists of appendixes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\appendix{\par
+  \c@chapter\z@ \c@section\z@
+  \let\chaptername\appendixname
+  \def\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Table of contents macros}
+%
+%    \cn{tableofcontents} is like \cn{chapter} or \cn{section} except
+%    for no number and no table of contents entry.
+%
+%    \cs{@pnumwidth} is the maximum width for page numbers in a table of
+%    contents.  |1.6em| allows enough room for three digits.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@pnumwidth}{1.6em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{@tocrmarg} is \cs{@pnumwidth} plus the desired minimum
+%    space (|1em|) between page numbers and the preceding text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@tocrmarg}{2.6em}
+%<amsart>\setcounter{tocdepth}{2}
+%<amsbook|amsproc>\setcounter{tocdepth}{1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newswitch{toc}
+\newswitch{lof}
+\newswitch{lot}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Since table of contents, list of figures and list of figures
+%    are identical in design as far as the chapter heading and other
+%    preliminaries go, we redefine \cs{@starttoc} to do the necessary
+%    work, rather than defining a new macro (which would use up another
+%    control sequence name).
+%
+%    We define first the article form of \cs{@starttoc}, then the book
+%    form.
+%
+%    Owing to confusion about what font to use for \cn{contentsname}, a
+%    symbolic name has been assigned to provide flexibility.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsart|amsproc>
+\newcommand\contentsnamefont{\scshape}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@starttoc#1#2{\begingroup
+  \setTrue{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Remove the skip after the abstract so that we can substitute another.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \par\removelastskip\vskip\z@skip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The first two arguments of \cs{@startsection} here are special values
+%    that cause different internal branches to be taken.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    Arguments: {} = name = empty
+%    \@M = no number should be used and no table of contents entry
+%    \z@ = indent amount
+%    12pt + 12pt = vskip before
+%    6pt = vskip after
+%    \centering\contentsnamefont = format
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@startsection{}\@M\z@{\linespacing\@plus\linespacing}%
+    {.5\linespacing}{\centering\contentsnamefont}{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If we have a list of figures or list of tables we want to put
+%    them in the main table of contents, but we don't want to put an
+%    entry there for the main table of contents itself. So we check
+%    to see if argument 2 is \cn{contentsname} and if it is then
+%    we refrain from doing \cn{addcontentsline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\contentsname#2%
+  \else \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{#2}\fi
+  \makeatletter
+  \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+  \if@filesw
+    \@xp\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+    \immediate\@xp\openout\csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+  \fi
+  \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup
+  \addvspace{32\p@\@plus14\p@}%
+  \let\tableofcontents\relax
+}
+%</amsart|amsproc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And here is the book form of \cs{@starttoc}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\@starttoc#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+  \setTrue{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Inside this group we change \cs{secdef} so that we can call
+%    \cn{chapter} and only get the preliminary part of its definition
+%    that we need.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\secdef\@gobbletwo \chapter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If we have a list of figures or list of tables we want to put
+%    them in the main table of contents, but we don't want to put an
+%    entry there for the main table of contents itself. So we check
+%    to see if argument 2 is \cn{contentsname} and if it is then
+%    we refrain from doing \cn{addcontentsline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\@secnumber\@empty % for \@tocwrite and \chaptermark
+  \ifx\contentsname#2%
+  \else \@tocwrite{chapter}{#2}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we do the equivalent of \cs{@schapter}. Expand \arg{2} so that
+%    it will be easy to apply uppercasing to it. (For \cs{@starttoc} we
+%    assume that \arg{2} is always a control such as \cn{contentsname}.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \typeout{#2}\@xp\chaptermark\@xp{#2}%
+  \@makeschapterhead{#2}\@afterheading
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Protect against document classes that have nonzero \cs{parskip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \parskip\z@skip
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And finally we read in the \fn{.toc} (or whatever) file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \makeatletter
+  \@input{\jobname.#1}%
+  \if@filesw
+    \@xp\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+    \immediate\@xp\openout\csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+  \fi
+  \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup
+  \newpage
+}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Now it is easy to define \cn{tableofcontents} and its relatives.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\contentsname{Contents}
+\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
+\def\tableofcontents{%
+  \@starttoc{toc}\contentsname
+}
+\def\listoffigures{\@starttoc{lof}\listfigurename}
+\def\listoftables{\@starttoc{lot}\listtablename}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In order to automatically leave enough space for the `number' part
+%    of toc entries, we compute the maximum width of the `number' part
+%    for each sectioning level and pass that information to
+%    \cs{@tocline} through the \fn{.aux} file.
+%
+%    Init the tocindents if they are not yet set (first run).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@for\@tempa:=-1,0,1,2,3\do{%
+    \@ifundefined{r@tocindent\@tempa}{%
+      \@xp\gdef\csname r@tocindent\@tempa\endcsname{0pt}}{}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@writetocindents}
+%    This function writes out the max toc indents to the aux file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@writetocindents{%
+  \begingroup
+  \@for\@tempa:=-1,0,1,2,3\do{%
+    \immediate\write\@auxout{%
+      \string\newlabel{tocindent\@tempa}{%
+        \csname r@tocindent\@tempa\endcsname}}%
+  }%
+  \endgroup}
+%
+\AtEndDocument{\@writetocindents}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+
+%  \begin{macro}{\indentlabel}
+%    This function is a no-op except in \cs{@tocwrite} where it is a
+%    pointer to \cs{@tochangmeasure}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\indentlabel\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@tochangmeasure}
+%    This function measures the hangindent part of a toc entry and
+%    updates the current max for the given sectioning level, if
+%    necessary. The max's at the end of the document will be written
+%    in the form of a pseudo-label to the \fn{.aux} file by
+%    \cs{@writetocindents}.
+%
+%    We can assume that \cs{@tochangmeasure} is already inside a group
+%    when called.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tochangmeasure#1{\sbox\z@{#1}%
+  \ifdim\wd\z@>\csname r@tocindent\@toclevel\endcsname\relax
+    \@xp\xdef\csname r@tocindent\@toclevel\endcsname{\the\wd\z@}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@toclevel}
+%    Initialize, for the record.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@toclevel{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Since we don't have leader dots, we have \cs{@tocline} instead of
+%    \cs{@dottedtocline}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tocline#1#2#3#4#5#6#7{\relax
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth % then omit
+  \else
+    \par \addpenalty\@secpenalty\addvspace{#2}%
+    \begingroup \hyphenpenalty\@M
+    \@ifempty{#4}{%
+      \@tempdima\csname r@tocindent\number#1\endcsname\relax
+    }{%
+      \@tempdima#4\relax
+    }%
+    \parindent\z@ \leftskip#3\relax \advance\leftskip\@tempdima\relax
+    \rightskip\@pnumwidth plus4em \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth
+    #5\leavevmode\hskip-\@tempdima #6\nobreak\relax
+    \hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\@tocpagenum{#7}}\par
+    \nobreak
+    \endgroup
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tocpagenum#1{\hss{\mdseries #1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The function \cs{@tocwrite} writes the information of a section
+%    heading to the \fn{.toc} file in a standard form. It allows
+%    different functions to be substituted for \cs{numberline}, to get
+%    greater control of toc formatting.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tocwrite#1{\@xp\@tocwriteb\csname toc#1\endcsname{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cn{chapter} command uses \cs{@tocwriteb} directly because of
+%    the need to write slightly different things to the toc file
+%    depending on the current value of \cn{chaptername}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tocwriteb#1#2#3{%
+  \begingroup
+    \def\@tocline##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
+      \ifnum##1>\c@tocdepth
+      \else \sbox\z@{##5\let\indentlabel\@tochangmeasure##6}\fi}%
+    \csname l@#2\endcsname{#1{\csname#2name\endcsname}{\@secnumber}{}}%
+  \endgroup
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{#2}%
+    {\protect#1{\csname#2name\endcsname}{\@secnumber}{#3}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Specs for monograph toc are as follows (tocdepth is 1, i.e.,
+%    subsections and lower are not listed in toc).
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% Part: Space above 12pt plus2pt, indent 0pt, "Part" + wordspace +
+% number + "." + 1em + title (raggedright, no hangindent) + 1em +
+% page number in column 1.6em wide.
+%
+% Chapter: Space above 8pt, hangindent on ("Chapter 0" + "." + 1em),
+% + title (raggedright) + 1em + page number in column 1.6em wide.
+%
+% Appendix: Same as Chapter except for epithet "Appendix M"
+%
+% Section: Space above 0pt, hangindent on (1pc + "0.0" + "." + 1em),
+% + title (raggedright) + 1em + page number in column 1.6em wide.
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    Specs for article toc are as follows (tocdepth 2):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% Section: Same as for monograph.
+%
+% Subsection: Space above 0pt, hangindent 6pc (number + "." + 1em),
+% + title (raggedright) + 1em + page number in column 1.6em wide.
+%
+% Subsubsection: Same as subsection but hangindent 8pc
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    Typical invocation of \cs{l@chapter}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \contentsline{chapter}{%
+%   \tocchapter{Chapter}{3}{Some title stuff}}{103}
+% -->\l@chapter-->
+%           #1 #2   #3  #4 #5
+% \@tocline{0}{8pt}{0pt}{}{\bfseries}
+%    #6           6a      6b 6c                 #7
+%   {\tocchapter{Chapter}{3}{Some title stuff}}{103}
+%\end{verbatim}%
+%    The \cs{tocchapter} is a slightly more useful form than
+%    \cs{numberline} that allows control for optionally omitting strings
+%    like `Chapter' or changing fonts for subcomponents of the toc
+%    entry. Note that it is allowed to have appendix and chapter at the
+%    same toc level, with \cs{tocappendix} instead of \cs{tocchapter}
+%    written in the \fn{.toc} file.
+%
+%    The arguments of \cs{@tocline} are as follows:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \@tocline{LEVEL}{VSPACE}{INDENT}{NUMBERWIDTH}{EXTRA}%
+%   {TEXT}{PAGENUM}
+%\end{verbatim}%
+%    where `numberwidth' is the width of the box allotted to contain the
+%    section number, including any preceding word like `Chapter' or
+%    `Part'. If this width arg is empty then an automatically computed
+%    width (max over TOC of the numberwidths for this level) is used.
+%    The `extra' argument is formatting such as font changes.
+%    The `text' argument contains a section-command specific function
+%    like \cs{tocsection} or \cs{tocchapter} which takes in turn three
+%    arguments: epithet, number, topic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@section{\@tocline{1}{0pt}{1pc}{}{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    *** The indents do not agree between in-house and distributed ***\\
+%    *** versions; no changes; get specs before revising.          ***\\
+%    The use of \cn{ignorespaces} in \cs{tocsection} and its relatives
+%    means that if \arg{1} is empty, the following space will be also
+%    removed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tocsection}[3]{%
+  \indentlabel{\@ifnotempty{#2}{\ignorespaces#1 #2.\quad}}#3}
+\def\l@subsection{\@tocline{2}{0pt}{1pc}{5pc}{}}
+\let\tocsubsection\tocsection
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@tocline{3}{0pt}{1pc}{7pc}{}}
+\let\tocsubsubsection\tocsection
+\let\l@paragraph\l@subsubsection
+\let\tocparagraph\tocsection
+\let\l@subparagraph\l@subsubsection
+\let\tocsubparagraph\tocsection
+%
+\def\l@part{\@tocline{-1}{12pt plus2pt}{0pt}{}{\bfseries}}
+\let\tocpart\tocsection
+\def\l@chapter{\@tocline{0}{8pt plus1pt}{0pt}{}{}}
+\let\tocchapter\tocsection
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In this case we are pretty sure the word "Appendix" or similar is
+%    present, so only check if arg 2 is empty:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\tocappendix}[3]{%
+  \indentlabel{#1\@ifnotempty{#2}{ #2}.\quad}#3}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\l@figure{\@tocline{0}{3pt plus2pt}{0pt}{1.5pc}{}}
+\let\l@table=\l@figure
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Bibliography section or chapter}
+%
+%    Following the \pkg{babel} package, we use \cn{refname} in articles
+%    and \cn{bibname} in books.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\refname{References}
+\def\bibname{Bibliography}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Restudy the following code; \cs{bibsetup} isn't used anywhere
+%    although it's defined for the three different bibstyles.
+%    Because some publications have different default label styles,
+%    separate that out for easy tailoring of packages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@defaultbiblabelstyle#1{#1.}
+\def\bibliographystyle#1{%
+    \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\bibstyle{#1}}\fi
+    \def\@tempa{#1}%
+    \def\@tempb{amsplain}%
+    \def\@tempc{}%
+    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+        \def\@biblabel##1{\@defaultbiblabelstyle{##1}}%
+        \def\bibsetup{}%
+    \else
+        \def\bibsetup{\labelsep6\p@}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@tempc
+            \def\@biblabel##1{}%
+            \def\bibsetup{\labelwidth\z@ \leftmargin24\p@
+                \itemindent-\leftmargin
+                \labelsep\z@ }%
+        \fi
+    \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Permit easy change of font size for unusual purpose, e.g., for
+%    an author's ``life list'' in collected works.  [bnb, 2004/04/01]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\bibliofont}{\footnotesize}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \env{thebibliography} differs in some author packages only in the
+%    shape of the title; make this easy to change.  [bnb, 2004/05/22]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@bibtitlestyle}{%
+%<amsart|amsproc>  \@xp\section\@xp*\@xp{\refname}%
+%<amsbook>  \@xp\chapter\@xp*\@xp{\bibname}%
+}
+\newenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
+  \@bibtitlestyle
+  \normalfont\bibliofont\labelsep .5em\relax
+  \renewcommand\theenumiv{\arabic{enumiv}}\let\p@enumiv\@empty
+  \list{\@biblabel{\theenumiv}}{\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+    \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+    \usecounter{enumiv}}%
+  \sloppy \clubpenalty\@M \widowpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \sfcode`\.=\@m
+}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Change error for empty list (no items) to warning, to allow authors
+%    to leave their bibliography temporarily empty during writing:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@noitemerr{\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
+  \endlist
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cn{bysame} command prints a horizontal dash indicating
+%    repetition of the author's name in consecutive bibliography
+%    entries.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bysame{\leavevmode\hbox to3em{\hrulefill}\thinspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We define \cn{newblock} even though it's not needed for AMS
+%    publication style, just to avoid error messages when a non-AMS
+%    \fn{.bst} file is used. This is a convenience for users; use of
+%    \cn{newblock} is not recommended for submissions to the AMS.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\newblock{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\MR}
+%  \begin{macro}{\MRhref}
+%    Provide an MR number for a bibliography item. At the moment
+%    [mjd,1995/08/07] this only prints the MR number, but later
+%    we expect to extend it to write an HTML \cs{special} to the
+%    \fn{.dvi} file.
+%
+%    The presentation of the MR number has been simplified (from using
+%    a bold volume number) coincident with the change in the MathSciNet
+%    database to a 7-digit reference number from the volume:number form.
+%
+%    Ensure that an old-style MR number does not break across lines if
+%    it contains a space; editorial request.  [bnb; 2004/04/01]
+%    Countermanded, to permit break between reference number and an
+%    old-style number following in parentheses.  [bnb; 2004/06/11]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\MR[1]{\relax\ifhmode\unskip\spacefactor3000 \space\fi
+  MR~\MRhref{#1}{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MRhref\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\URL}
+%  \begin{macro}{\URLhref}
+%  \begin{macro}{\@URL}
+%    Allows sticking in an arbitrary URL in a bibliography. Leading
+%    ``http'' is not assumed. Call \cn{verb} to ensure that special
+%    characters in the URL don't cause trouble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\URL{\begingroup
+  \def\@sverb##1{%
+    \def\@tempa####1##1{\@URL{####1}\egroup\endgroup}%
+    \@tempa}%
+  \verb}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\URLhref\@gobble
+\def\@URL#1{\URLhref{#1}#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \subsection{Index section or chapter}
+%
+%    Chapter or section heading for an index. Index is set up to be two
+%    columns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@restonecol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\indexchap#1{\global\topskip 7.5pc\relax
+  \twocolumn[{\fontsize{\@xivpt}{18}\bfseries\centering
+    \vskip\topskip\hbox{}\vskip-\baselineskip% adjust top space
+    #1\par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    After \cs{twocolumn} finishes operating, the top material is left in an
+%    insert register, and topskip will now be applied above the
+%    following material. So we should set it to the normal
+%    after-chapter-title space (34pt)---cf.~\cs{@makeschapterhead}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   \global\topskip 34\p@\relax
+   \ifx\@empty\indexintro
+   \else
+     \begingroup \normalsize
+       \skip@\topskip \advance\skip@ -\baselineskip
+       \vskip\skip@
+       \parbox[t]{24pc}{\normalfont\indexintro\par}%
+     \endgroup
+     \global\topskip 24\p@\relax
+   \fi
+  }]%
+}
+\newcommand{\indexintro}{}
+%</amsbook>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \env{theindex} differs in some author packages only in the
+%    shape of the title; make this easy to change.  [bnb, 2004/05/22]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@indextitlestyle}{%
+%<*amsbook>
+  \let\@makeschapterhead\indexchap
+  \@xp\chapter\@xp*\@xp{\indexname}%
+%</amsbook>
+%<amsart|amsproc>  \twocolumn[\@xp\section\@xp*\@xp{\indexname}]%
+}
+\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+  \columnseprule\z@ \columnsep 35\p@
+  \@indextitlestyle
+  \thispagestyle{plain}%
+  \let\item\@idxitem
+  \parindent\z@  \parskip\z@\@plus.3\p@\relax
+  \raggedright
+  \hyphenpenalty\@M
+  \footnotesize}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 2em}
+\def\subitem{\par\hangindent 2em\hspace*{1em}}
+\def\subsubitem{\par\hangindent 3em\hspace*{2em}}
+\def\endtheindex{\if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi}
+\def\indexspace{\par\bigskip}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Footnotes}
+%    In books the footnote counter should reset to 0 at the beginning of
+%    each chapter:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsbook>\@addtoreset{footnote}{chapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Rule above footnotes is 5 picas wide.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\footnoterule{\kern-.4\p@
+        \hrule\@width 5pc\kern11\p@\kern-\footnotesep}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    A simple superscript doesn't work here; it fails on a minipage,
+%    where \cs{itshape} (which is invalid in math mode) is used for the
+%    footnote numbers. Cf.~ the definition of \cn{textprime}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makefnmark{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \raise.9ex\hbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@\normalfont\@thefnmark}%
+}
+%
+\def\@makefntext{\indent\@makefnmark}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Add \cn{normalfont} before \cn{footnotesize} so that
+%    fonts will come out properly using the new font selection scheme.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@footnotetext#1{%
+  \insert\footins{%
+    \normalfont\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox
+    \floatingpenalty\@MM \hsize\columnwidth
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Mostly \cs{@parboxrestore} does what we want; but not with
+%    respect to \cs{parindent} and \cs{tolerance}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@parboxrestore \parindent\normalparindent \sloppy
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+      \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \@makefntext{%
+      \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\unskip\strut\par}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We change \cn{sloppy} to keep it from overriding our normal value of
+%    1pt for \cs{hfuzz} and \cs{vfuzz} with a LESS sloppy value (.5pt).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\hfuzz=1pt \vfuzz=\hfuzz
+\def\sloppy{\tolerance9999 \emergencystretch 3em\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Float placement parameters}
+%    These control the placing of floating objects like tables and
+%    figures. We use much more tolerant values than the \latex/ defaults;
+%    the \latex/ defaults are geared to fussier page breaks, at a price of
+%    requiring more manual intervention to deal with difficult page
+%    breaking problems.
+%
+%    When using \latex/'s twocolumn option, `page' really means `column',
+%    for the parameters that don't have a dbl prefix: that is, topnumber
+%    is then the maximum number of top figures allowed in each column,
+%    and so forth.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[topnumber] maximum number of top figures allowed per page
+% \item[bottomnumber] maximum number of bottom figures allowed per page
+% \item[totalnumber] maximum number of figures (top and bottom) allowed
+%    per page
+% \item[dbltopnumber] same as topnumber, but for two-column wide
+%    figures, when double-column format is used
+% \end{description}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{4}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{4}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Float fraction parameters.
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{topfraction}] maximum part of the page allowed for top
+%    figures, expressed as a decimal fraction. The value of .97 means
+%    roughly `accept pages that have only two lines of text, and the
+%    rest figures'.
+% \item[\cs{bottomfraction}] same as \cs{topfraction}, but for bottom
+%    figures
+% \item[\cs{textfraction}] \emph{minimum} part of the page that must be
+%    occupied by text, if the page is to have any text at all. If this
+%    value cannot be achieved, \latex/ will turn the current figure or
+%    figures into a ``float page'', i.e., a page of figures without any
+%    text.
+% \item[\cs{floatpagefraction}] minimum amount (that is, total combined
+%    height) of figures needed before \latex/ will make a float page. This
+%    is expressed as a fraction of the normal page height.
+% \item[\cs{dbltopfraction}] like \cs{topfraction}, but applies only to
+%    figures that are two columns wide, when double-column format is
+%    used.
+% \item[\cs{dblfloatpagefraction}] minimum amount of double-column
+%    figure material needed before \latex/ will make a two-column wide
+%    ``float page''
+% \end{description}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.97}
+\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.97}
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.03}
+\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9}
+\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.97}
+\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.9}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We also modify the default values for spacing around floating
+%    figures: (A) so that figures on a float page will not be
+%    vertically centered on the total page height but will
+%    be flush at the top of the page, and (B) so that there will
+%    be slightly more stretchability around figures, to help find better
+%    page breaks in difficult situations.
+%
+% \begin{description}
+% \item[\cs{floatsep}] Space between consecutive figures
+% \item[\cs{textfloatsep}] Space between text and top or bottom figures
+% \item[\cs{intextsep}] Space above and below a figure in the middle of
+%    the text (i.e., placed with the |[h]| option)
+% \item[\cs{dblfloatsep}] Space between consecutive figures that are
+%    two columns wide (when two-column format is used)
+% \item[\cs{dbltextfloatsep}] Space between double-column figures and text
+% \item[\cs{@fptop}] Space above the first figure on a float page
+% \item[\cs{@fpsep}] Space between figures on a float page
+% \item[\cs{@fpbot}] Space below the last figure on a float page
+% \item[\cs{@dblfptop}] Space above the first double-column figure on a
+%    two-column wide float page
+% \item[\cs{@dblfptop}] Space between double-column figures on a  two-column
+%    wide float page
+% \item[\cs{@dblfptop}] Space below the last double-column figure on a
+%    two-column wide float page
+% \end{description}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setlength{\floatsep}{12pt plus 6pt minus 4pt}
+\setlength{\textfloatsep}{15pt plus 8pt minus 5pt}
+\setlength{\intextsep}{12pt plus 6pt minus 4pt}
+\setlength{\dblfloatsep}{12pt plus 6pt minus 4pt}
+\setlength{\dbltextfloatsep}{15pt plus 8pt minus 5pt}
+\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}% removed "plus 1fil"
+\setlength{\@fpsep}{8pt}% removed "plus 2fil"
+\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fil}
+\setlength{\@dblfptop}{0pt}% removed "plus 1fil"
+\setlength{\@dblfpsep}{8pt}% removed "plus 2fil"
+\setlength{\@dblfpbot}{0pt plus 1fil}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \cs{fps@figure}, \cs{fps@table}: placement specifications for
+%    \env{figure} and \env{table} environments. `|tbp|' means that a
+%    figure will be placed at the top or bottom of a page, or on a
+%    separate page with no text. This might be changed to `|tp|', for
+%    example, if you never want figures to appear at the bottom of a
+%    page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\fps@figure}{tbp}
+\newcommand{\fps@table}{tbp}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Some more setup for figures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsart|amsproc>\newcounter{figure}
+%<amsbook>\newcounter{figure}[chapter]
+\def\@captionheadfont{\scshape}
+\def\@captionfont{\normalfont}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\ \thefigure}
+\def\figurename{Figure}
+\newenvironment{figure}{%
+  \@float{figure}%
+}{%
+  \end@float
+}
+\newenvironment{figure*}{%
+  \@dblfloat{figure}%
+}{%
+  \end@dblfloat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And similar for tables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsart|amsproc>\newcounter{table}
+%<amsbook>\newcounter{table}[chapter]
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename\ \thetable}
+\def\tablename{Table}
+\newenvironment{table}{%
+  \@float{table}%
+}{%
+  \end@float
+}
+\newenvironment{table*}{%
+  \@dblfloat{table}%
+}{%
+  \end@dblfloat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Change \cs{@floatboxreset} to add \cn{centering}. Centering is
+%    always applied to tables and figures in AMS publications. It should
+%    not be necessary to throw in |\begin{center}| \ldots |\end{center}|
+%    in every instance to achieve this.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@floatboxreset{\global\@minipagefalse \centering}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    This is what we want \cs{@makecaption} to do: If the total width is
+%    greater than normal columnwidth we want to break the caption into
+%    lines using a line width of $W$ = (columnwidth $-$ 6pc), and center
+%    the resulting block between the margins. Otherwise we want to set
+%    the caption as a single line, centered between the margins.
+%
+%    To do this we set the caption as a vbox with line width $W$,
+%    except that we allow the last line (which may be the only line) to
+%    have width up to full columnwidth by adding a kern of -6pc. If the
+%    result is a single hbox (i.e., a single line) we need to unpack the
+%    hbox, remove rightskip, parfillskip, and the -6pc kern, and center
+%    the remaining material. If the caption is more than one line, then
+%    box 1 contains the last line, which we need to unpack in the same
+%    way, and run through the paragraphing process again (because this
+%    last line may be up to 6 picas wider than the desired width).
+%
+%    In practice this procedure tends to fail if there are any potential
+%    breakpoints near the end of the first line (in the window between
+%    short-width and full-width). Then \TeX{} tends to choose a break
+%    (depending on spaceskip, tolerance, etc) at the last acceptable
+%    breakpoint before short-width is exceeded, \emph{without
+%    considering any later material}---in particular, the negative kern.
+%    [This was pointed out by Donald Arseneau, May 2000.] Unfortunately,
+%    setting parfillskip to a negative value does not work either. I
+%    guess this is a special case of the existing limitation on
+%    parshape: you cannot specify a parshape in terms of number of lines
+%    from the bottom of the paragraph. (We would like to specify a
+%    parshape where the last line is 6 picas longer than the others.)
+%
+%    Finally, if the caption is for a figure, it will be set below the
+%    figure, so the separating space goes above the caption;  otherwise
+%    the separating space goes below the caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Measure the contents of the caption.  If \arg{2} is not
+%    empty, then we must add a period and an en-space before
+%    typesetting it.  The \cs{@caption} macro adds an extra
+%    \cn{ignorespaces} at the beginning of \arg{2}, so in order
+%    to find out if the user-typed portion is empty we use
+%    \cs{@cdr} to pull off the \cn{ignorespaces}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    Use color-safe commands
+  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\color@setgroup
+    \advance\hsize-2\captionindent\noindent
+    \@captionfont\@captionheadfont#1\@xp\@ifnotempty\@xp
+        {\@cdr#2\@nil}{.\@captionfont\upshape\enspace#2}%
+    \unskip\kern-2\captionindent\par
+    \global\setbox\@ne\lastbox\color@endgroup}%
+  \ifhbox\@ne % the normal case
+    \setbox\@ne\hbox{\unhbox\@ne\unskip\unskip\unpenalty\unkern}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If \cs{@tempboxa} is not empty at this point then the caption was
+%    more than one line long or there was extra vertical mode material,
+%    maybe a \cs{write} (from \cn{index} or something).
+%    Interestingly, we can't use \cs{ifvoid} to see if
+%    \cs{@tempboxa} is empty, because empty is not the same thing
+%    as void (as far as the \cs{ifvoid} test is concerned).  So
+%    instead we measure the width of \cs{@tempboxa}
+%    to see if it's zero; this should suffice for non-bizarre cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa=\z@ % this means caption will fit on one line
+    \setbox\@ne\hbox to\columnwidth{\hss\kern-2\captionindent\box\@ne\hss}%
+  \else % tempboxa contained more than one line
+    \setbox\@ne\vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa\parskip\z@skip
+        \noindent\unhbox\@ne\advance\hsize-2\captionindent\par}%
+  \fi
+  \ifnum\@tempcnta<64 % if the float IS a figure...
+    \addvspace\abovecaptionskip
+    \hbox to\hsize{\kern\captionindent\box\@ne\hss}%
+  \else % if the float IS NOT a figure...
+    \hbox to\hsize{\kern\captionindent\box\@ne\hss}%
+    \nobreak
+    \vskip\belowcaptionskip
+  \fi
+\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Allocate the skip registers for above and below caption space.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\abovecaptionskip \abovecaptionskip=12pt \relax
+\newskip\belowcaptionskip \belowcaptionskip=12pt \relax
+\newdimen\captionindent \captionindent=3pc
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Miscellaneous}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\nonbreakingspace}
+%    Change \qc{\~} to be more forgiving of accidental adjacent spaces.
+%    Note that this means multiple |~~~...| cannot be used to get
+%    multiple spaces in the output.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonbreakingspace{\unskip\nobreak\ \ignorespaces}
+\def~{\protect\nonbreakingspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Redefine \cs{@biblabel} to do nothing if the argument is empty. We
+%    don't really care what the previous definition was so we don't
+%    check it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@biblabel#1{\@ifnotempty{#1}{[#1]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Changed \cs{@cite} to always use roman/upright, nonbold font, even
+%    in italic or bold text (following AMS style).
+%    Turn off \cs{mathsurround} just in case there are subscripts in the
+%    cite numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@citestyle{\m@th\upshape\mdseries}
+%<amsart>\let\citeform\@firstofone
+%<amsbook|amsproc>\def\citeform#1{{\bfseries#1}}
+\def\@cite#1#2{{%
+  \@citestyle[\citeform{#1}\if@tempswa, #2\fi]}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Make \cn{cite} robust if it isn't already. Too many unsuspecting
+%    users get problems from this in a figure or table caption.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{cite }{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname cite \endcsname\cite
+  \edef\cite{\@nx\protect\@xp\@nx\csname cite \endcsname}%
+}{}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\fullwidthdisplay}
+%    The function \cs{fullwidthdisplay} makes a displayed equation take
+%    up the full column width even if the current context is an indented
+%    list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\fullwidthdisplay{\displayindent\z@ \displaywidth\columnwidth}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    And we insert the \cs{fullwidthdisplay} function at the beginning of
+%    \cs{everydisplay} just in case any later code in \cs{everydisplay}
+%    needs to use the values of \cs{displayindent} or \cs{displaywidth}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\@tempa{\noexpand\fullwidthdisplay\the\everydisplay}
+\everydisplay\expandafter{\@tempa}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    A few odds and ends for indexes, based on \pkg{makeindex}.  The
+%    definition of \cn{see} as ``see also'' is unfortunate, but of
+%    long standing, and cannot be changed without destroying backward
+%    compatibility, so an alternate command, \cn{seeonly}, is provided
+%    to cover the basic situation.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\seeonlyname{see}
+\newcommand*\seename{see also}
+\newcommand*\alsoname{see also}
+\newcommand*\seeonly[2]{\emph{\seeonlyname} #1}
+\newcommand*\see[2]{\emph{\seename} #1}
+\newcommand*\seealso[2]{\emph{\alsoname} #1}
+\newcommand\printindex{\@input{\jobname.ind}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\textprime}
+%    A text prime symbol, for applying primes to numbers such as list
+%    numbers or equation numbers that are not really math. Furthermore
+%    Cyrillic myagkii znak, or soft sign, is represented by a prime
+%    symbol in Russian names when they are transliterated into English.
+%
+%    \cn{textprime} uses the prime symbol from math, but because it's
+%    intended specifically for nonmath use, we avoid going through math
+%    mode with \verb'$...$'. We must therefore call \cs{check@mathfonts}
+%    to ensure that \verb'scriptfont2' is actually defined. Otherwise,
+%    if \cn{textprime} were used in a document before the first math
+%    formula, there would be no adequate assignment yet for
+%    \verb'\scriptfont2'.
+%
+%    The raise value of \verb'.8ex' is just a reasonable guess at making
+%    the bottom of the prime symbol fall near the top of a preceding
+%    lowercase letter but still not fall too low on an uppercase letter.
+%    We could look up the \cs{fontdimen} values used in math mode for
+%    superscripts but I don't think it's worth the bother.
+%
+%    Cf.~also the definition of \cs{@makefnmark}. The prime symbol here
+%    is not raised quite so high because I think that is desirable for
+%    the soft-sign usage.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textprime{\leavevmode
+  \raise.8ex\hbox{\check@mathfonts\the\scriptfont2 \char48 }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \subsection{Book style variations}
+%    Here is the layout for a \cn{maketitle} in the \cls{amsbook} class.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsbook>
+\def\maketitle{\par
+  \@topnum\z@ % this prevents figures from falling at the top of page 1
+  \begingroup
+  \@maketitle
+  \endgroup
+  \c@footnote\z@
+  \def\do##1{\let##1\relax}%
+  \do\maketitle \do\@maketitle \do\title \do\@xtitle \do\@title
+  \do\author \do\@xauthor \do\address \do\@xaddress
+  \do\email \do\@xemail \do\curraddr \do\@xcurraddr
+  \do\dedicatory \do\@dedicatory \do\thanks \do\thankses
+  \do\keywords \do\@keywords \do\subjclass \do\@subjclass
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@maketitle{%
+  \cleardoublepage \thispagestyle{empty}%
+  \begingroup \topskip\z@skip
+  \null\vfil
+  \begingroup
+  \LARGE\bfseries \centering
+  \openup\medskipamount
+  \@title\par\vspace{24pt}%
+  \def\and{\par\medskip}\centering
+  \mdseries\authors\par\bigskip
+  \endgroup
+  \vfil
+  \ifx\@empty\addresses \else \@setaddresses \fi
+  \vfil
+  \ifx\@empty\@dedicatory
+  \else \begingroup
+    \centering{\footnotesize\itshape\@dedicatory\@@par}%
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+  \vfill
+  \newpage\thispagestyle{empty}
+  \begin{center}
+    \ifx\@empty\@subjclass\else\@setsubjclass\fi
+    \ifx\@empty\@keywords\else\@setkeywords\fi
+    \ifx\@empty\@translators\else\vfil\@settranslators\fi
+    \ifx\@empty\thankses\else\vfil\@setthanks\fi
+  \end{center}
+  \vfil
+  \@setabstract
+  \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Define the desired form for translator names.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@settranslators{\par
+  \begingroup
+  \translname: \andify\@translators \uppercasenonmath\@translators
+  \@translators \@@par
+  \endgroup}
+\def\@setdate{\par\smallskip\@date\par\smallskip}
+\def\@setsubjclass{\par\smallskip
+  {\itshape\subjclassname.}\enspace\@subjclass\par\smallskip}
+\def\@setkeywords{\par\smallskip
+  {\itshape \keywordsname.}\enspace \@keywords\par\smallskip}
+%</amsbook>
+%</classes>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Setup for theorems, definitions, remarks, proofs}
+%  \subsubsection{Intended usage}
+%
+%    Here are some examples showing the kinds of theorem environment
+%    declarations that are possible.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \newtheorem{prop}{Proposition}
+% \newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}[section]
+% \newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}
+% \newtheorem*{Zorn}{Zorn's Lemma}
+%
+% \theoremstyle{definition}
+% \newtheorem{dfn}{Definition}
+%
+% \theoremstyle{remark}
+% \newtheorem*{rmk}{Remark}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    The first four statements all define environments using the default
+%    theorem style (`plain'), since there is no prefatory
+%    \cn{theoremstyle} declaration. The first statement defines an
+%    automatically numbered \env{prop} environment whose headings will
+%    look like this: Proposition 1, Proposition 2, and so forth. The
+%    second statement defines an environment \env{thm} with numbers
+%    subordinate to section numbers, so the headings will look like
+%    this: Theorem 1.1, Theorem 1.2, Theorem 1.3, \dots, (in section 2:)
+%    Theorem 2.1, Theorem 2.2, and so forth. The third statement defines
+%    a \env{lem} environment whose numbers will interleave in sequence
+%    with the theorem numbers: Theorem 1.3, Lemma 1.4, Lemma 1.5,
+%    Theorem 1.6, and so forth. The fourth statement defines a special
+%    unnumbered lemma named `Zorn's Lemma'. The remaining two
+%    \cn{newtheorem} statements have no special features except for the
+%    \cn{theoremstyle} declarations that cause the \env{dfn} and
+%    \env{rmk} environments to have some differences in appearance.
+%
+%    There are three basic styles provided: The `plain' style produces
+%    bold headings and italic body text; the `definition' style produces
+%    bold headings and normal body text; the `remark' style produces
+%    italic headings and normal body text.
+%
+%    A \cn{swapnumbers} command allows theorem numbers to be swapped to
+%    the front of the theorem headings. Putting \cn{swapnumbers} in your
+%    document preamble will cause \emph{all following} \cn{newtheorem}
+%    statements to produce number-first headings. (To provide maximum
+%    control, \cn{swapnumbers} is designed so that it can be used more
+%    than once; each time it is used, theorem numbers will be swapped to
+%    the opposite side for all following \cn{newtheorem} statements. But
+%    rarely will it need to be invoked more than once per document.)
+%
+% \subsubsection{Custom theorem styles}
+%    There is a \cn{newtheoremstyle} command provided to make the
+%    creation of custom theoremstyles fairly easy.
+%
+%    Usage:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%                   #1
+% \newtheoremstyle{NAME}%
+%     #2          #3          #4
+%   {ABOVESPACE}{BELOWSPACE}{BODYFONT}%
+%     #5      #6        #7         #8
+%   {INDENT}{HEADFONT}{HEADPUNCT}{HEADSPACE}%
+%     #9
+%   {CUSTOM-HEAD-SPEC}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    Leaving the `indent' argument empty is equivalent to entering
+%    |0pt|. The `headpunct' and `headspace' arguments are for the
+%    punctuation and horizontal space between the theorem head and the
+%    following text. There are two special values that may be used for
+%    `headspace': a single space means that a normal interword space
+%    should be used; ``\cn{newline}'' means that there should be a line
+%    break after the head instead of horizontal space. The
+%    `custom-head-spec' argument follows a special convention: it is
+%    interpreted as the replacement text for an internal three-argument
+%    function \cn{thmhead}, i.e., as if you were defining
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \renewcommand{\thmhead}[3]{...#1...#2...#3...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    but omitting the initial |\renewcommand{\thmhead}[3]|. The three
+%    arguments that will be supplied to \cn{thmhead} are the name,
+%    number, and optional note components. Within the replacement text
+%    you can (and normally will want to) use other special functions
+%    \cn{thmname}, \cn{thmnumber}, and \cn{thmnote}. These will print
+%    their argument if and only if the corresponding argument of
+%    \cn{thmhead} is nonempty. For example
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% {\thmname{#1}\thmnumber{ #2}\thmnote{ (#3)}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    This would cause the theorem note \arg{3} to be printed with a
+%    preceding space and enclosing parentheses, if it is present, and if
+%    it is absent, the space and parentheses will be omitted because
+%    they are inside the argument of \cn{thmnote}.
+%
+%    Finally, if you have an extra bit of arbitrary code that you want
+%    to slip in somewhere, the best place to do it is in the `body font'
+%    argument.
+%
+%    The \cn{newtheoremstyle} command is designed to provide, through a
+%    relatively simple interface, control over the style aspects that
+%    are most commonly changed. More complex requirements must be
+%    addressed through a separate \latex/ package.
+%
+%    When you set up custom theorem styles with \cn{newtheoremstyle} you
+%    should not use \cn{swapnumbers}. You have full control of the
+%    ordering of elements in the theorem head, just place them where you
+%    want. Or, if you do use \cn{swapnumbers}, you must look at the
+%    definition of \cs{swappedhead} and change it appropriately.
+
+% \subsubsection{Implementation}
+%    The \cn{theoremstyle} command is very simple except for the need to
+%    warn about an unknown theoremstyle.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsthm|classes>
+\newcommand{\theoremstyle}[1]{%
+  \@ifundefined{th@#1}{%
+    \PackageWarning{amsthm}{Unknown theoremstyle `#1'}%
+    \thm@style{plain}%
+  }{%
+    \thm@style{#1}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\thm@style
+\thm@style{plain}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    What's really needed is a full-fledged systematic approach for
+%    specifying the desired order and formatting of the three identified
+%    parts of a theorem head (name, number, note).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\thm@bodyfont  \thm@bodyfont{\itshape}
+\newtoks\thm@headfont  \thm@headfont{\bfseries}
+\newtoks\thm@notefont  \thm@notefont{}
+\newtoks\thm@headpunct \thm@headpunct{.}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Vertical spacing: initialize to current value of \cs{topsep}.
+%    If a document class loads the \pkg{amsthm} package it
+%    should take care to set these variables explicitly, if current
+%    \cs{topsep} is not the desired value.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\thm@preskip \newskip\thm@postskip
+%<*classes>
+\def\thm@space@setup{%
+  \thm@preskip=.5\baselineskip\@plus.2\baselineskip
+                             \@minus.2\baselineskip
+  \thm@postskip=\thm@preskip
+}
+%</classes>
+%<*amsthm>
+\def\thm@space@setup{%
+  \thm@preskip=\topsep \thm@postskip=\thm@preskip
+}
+%</amsthm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Modify \cn{newtheorem} to add |*| option. If a |*| is found, pass
+%    it on to \cs{@xnthm} as the first argument. (This information
+%    enables us to handle two different possibilities in a single
+%    function \cs{@xnthm} instead of needing two separate functions.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\newtheorem}{\@ifstar{\@xnthm *}{\@xnthm \relax}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Check to see if an optional arg is present after the first
+%    mandatory arg (which is \arg{2} at the moment since the |*| or
+%    non-|*| is \arg{1}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xnthm#1#2{%
+  \let\@tempa\relax
+  \@xp\@ifdefinable\csname #2\endcsname{%
+    \global\@xp\let\csname end#2\endcsname\@endtheorem
+    \ifx *#1% unnumbered, need to get one more mandatory arg
+      \edef\@tempa##1{%
+        \gdef\@xp\@nx\csname#2\endcsname{%
+          \@nx\@thm{\@xp\@nx\csname th@\the\thm@style\endcsname}%
+            {}{##1}}}%
+    \else % numbered theorem, need to check for optional arg
+      \def\@tempa{\@oparg{\@ynthm{#2}}[]}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Environment numbered together with a previously defined
+%    environment.
+%
+%    Arg1: env name, e.g. `thm'\par
+%    Arg2: optional sibling counter\par
+%    Arg3: heading text e.g. `Theorem'
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@ynthm#1[#2]#3{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If optional arg \arg{2} is empty, call \cs{@xthm} to look for a
+%    possible optional arg in terminal position. Note that
+%    the two optional args are mutually exclusive. As \arg{2} is a
+%    counter name and must be processed by \cs{csname} anyway,
+%    we can use a simpler test instead of \cs{@ifempty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\relax#2\relax
+    \def\@tempa{\@oparg{\@xthm{#1}{#3}}[]}%
+  \else
+    \@ifundefined{c@#2}{%
+      \def\@tempa{\@nocounterr{#2}}%
+    }{%
+      \@xp\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@xp\@nx\csname the#2\endcsname}%
+      \toks@{#3}%
+      \@xp\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{%
+        \@nx\@thm{%
+          \let\@nx\thm@swap
+            \if S\thm@swap\@nx\@firstoftwo\else\@nx\@gobble\fi
+          \@xp\@nx\csname th@\the\thm@style\endcsname}%
+            {#2}{\the\toks@}}%
+      \let\@tempa\relax
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Environment numbered relative to the counter given as \arg{3}. This
+%    function should really be named \cs{@znthm} but we're trying to
+%    save a bit of hash table and string pool by reusing one of the
+%    command names rendered obsolete by the \pkg{amsthm} package.
+%
+%    Arg1: env name e.g. `thm';
+%    Arg2: heading text e.g. `Theorem';
+%    Arg3: parent counter e.g. section.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@xthm#1#2[#3]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Set up the counter \verb'c@#1' and optionally add it to the reset
+%    list of counter \arg{3}. As \arg{3} is a
+%    counter name and must be processed by \cs{csname} anyway,
+%    we can use a simpler test instead of \cs{@ifempty}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\relax#3\relax
+    \newcounter{#1}%
+  \else
+    \newcounter{#1}[#3]%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define \cn{thexxx} to be \verb'\theyyy.\arabic{xxx}' (assuming
+%    default values of punctuation and numbering style). The use of
+%    \cs{xdef} here is inherited from the old \latex/ code, I'm not
+%    sure it's a good idea in general, but there should not be any
+%    problems unless someone changes the value of \cs{@thmcountersep} or
+%    \cs{@thmcounter}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@xp\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@xp\@nx\csname the#3\endcsname
+      \@thmcountersep\@thmcounter{#1}}%
+  \fi
+  \toks@{#2}%
+  \@xp\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{%
+    \@nx\@thm{%
+      \let\@nx\thm@swap
+        \if S\thm@swap\@nx\@firstoftwo\else\@nx\@gobble\fi
+      \@xp\@nx\csname th@\the\thm@style\endcsname}%
+      {#1}{\the\toks@}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    [mjd,1999/10/13] The following code doesn't handle the case where
+%    an equation is immediately followed by a theorem with no
+%    intervening \cs{par}---then the spacefactor is 1000.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% % \def\thm@check@break{%
+% %   \ifhmode \unskip \unskip
+% %     \edef\pre@thm@spacefactor{\the\spacefactor}\par
+% %     \edef\thm@topbreak{%
+% %       \ifnum\pre@thm@spacefactor<\sfcode`\!\relax
+% %          % preceding text line did not end with end-of-sentence punctuation
+% %         \ifnum\prevgraf=\@ne \penalty\widowpenalty
+% %         \else \penalty9999\relax
+% %         \fi
+% %       \else
+% %         \@nx\addpenalty{\@beginparpenalty}%
+% %       \fi
+% %     }%
+% %   \else
+% %     \def\thm@topbreak{\addpenalty\@beginparpenalty}%
+% %   \fi
+% % }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If arg \arg{2} is empty, this is an unnumbered environment;
+%    otherwise \arg{2} is the name of a counter. \arg{3} is descriptive
+%    name such as ``Theorem'' or ``Lemma''. Arg \arg{1} is the style
+%    function, for example \cs{th@plain}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@thm#1#2#3{%
+  \ifhmode\unskip\unskip\par\fi
+  \normalfont
+  \trivlist
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Explicitly set plain style here, then override parts as necessary
+%    in the function provided as \arg{1}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\thmheadnl\relax
+  \let\thm@swap\@gobble
+%<amsart>  \let\thm@indent\noindent % no indent
+%<amsart>  \thm@headfont{\bfseries}% heading font bold
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \let\thm@indent\indent % indent
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \thm@headfont{\scshape}% heading font small caps
+  \thm@notefont{\fontseries\mddefault\upshape}%
+  \thm@headpunct{.}% add period after heading
+  \thm@headsep 5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@\relax
+  \thm@space@setup
+  #1% style overrides
+  \@topsep \thm@preskip               % used by thm head
+  \@topsepadd \thm@postskip           % used by \@endparenv
+  \def\@tempa{#2}\ifx\@empty\@tempa
+    \def\@tempa{\@oparg{\@begintheorem{#3}{}}[]}%
+  \else
+    \refstepcounter{#2}%
+    \def\@tempa{\@oparg{\@begintheorem{#3}{\csname the#2\endcsname}}[]}%
+  \fi
+  \@tempa
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The internal function \cs{@restorelabelsep} starts out as a no-op.
+%    I don't think this is needed any more [mjd,2000/10/26].
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@restorelabelsep{\relax}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    This variation of the \cs{@thm} command is no longer needed. The
+%    variation \cs{@xthm} was commandeered for \cn{newtheorem} use.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@ythm\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Init \cn{thmname} etc.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\thmname\@iden \let\thmnote\@iden \let\thmnumber\@iden
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@upn}
+%    The function \cs{\@upn} is used to force theorem numbers and
+%    similar elements to be upright even when the current font is
+%    italic. If a suitable italic font with upright numbers and
+%    punctuation is available, this function should be redefined to be a
+%    no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\@upn{\textup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Definitions for theorem heads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\thmhead@plain#1#2#3{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    To allow for the case where the thmname part is empty and the
+%    heading consists only of a number (don't laugh, we have
+%    examples from real mathematical manuscripts), we don't add the
+%    space at the beginning of thmnumber unless \arg{1} is nonempty.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \thmname{#1}\thmnumber{\@ifnotempty{#1}{ }\@upn{#2}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    In thmnote we always add a leading space, i.e., assuming that
+%    at least one of the preceding parts will always be present.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \thmnote{ {\the\thm@notefont(#3)}}}
+\let\thmhead\thmhead@plain
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Swappedhead is for the case where the number precedes the
+%    word "Theorem". When the numbers fall on the left, like section
+%    numbers, AMS journal style calls for them to be lightface. We get
+%    this by invoking \cs{@secnumfont}.
+%
+%    In handling the punctuation after the number we have to step
+%    delicately if we want to successfully handle cases where the
+%    theorem name is empty (this is very rare, yet it sometimes arises
+%    in practice).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\swappedhead#1#2#3{%
+%<amsthm>  \thmnumber{#2}%
+%<amsthm>  \thmname{\@ifnotempty{#2}{~}#1}%
+%<classes>  \thmnumber{\@upn{\@secnumfont#2\@ifnotempty{#1}{.~}}}%
+%<classes>  \thmname{#1}%
+  \thmnote{ {\the\thm@notefont(#3)}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    A customized definition of \cs{th@plain} written for version 1.x of
+%    the \pkg{amsthm} package might refer to \cs{swappedhead@plain}; this
+%    gives it a definition for backward compatibility.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\swappedhead@plain=\swappedhead
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In \cs{@begintheorem} \cn{thmheadnl} is called after the theorem
+%    head: maybe a newline, otherwise a no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\thmheadnl\relax
+\let\thm@indent\noindent
+\let\thm@swap\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If argument \arg{2} is empty, then this is an unnumbered
+%    environment. Otherwise \arg{2} is a numbering command such as
+%    \cn{thexyz}. We use \cs{deferred@thm@head} instead of \cs{item} in
+%    order to allow line breaking in the optional note argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2[#3]{%
+  \deferred@thm@head{\the\thm@headfont \thm@indent
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Changes to \cs{thmnumber} and \cs{thmnote} are local to the
+%    containing box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifempty{#1}{\let\thmname\@gobble}{\let\thmname\@iden}%
+    \@ifempty{#2}{\let\thmnumber\@gobble}{\let\thmnumber\@iden}%
+    \@ifempty{#3}{\let\thmnote\@gobble}{\let\thmnote\@iden}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The \cs{thm@swap} function selects either \cs{swappedhead} or
+%    \cs{thmhead}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \thm@swap\swappedhead\thmhead{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    I can't think of any example where the after-head punctuation
+%    should be omitted so it seems correct not to use \cs{@addpunct}
+%    here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \the\thm@headpunct
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    If this \emph{is} a newline (from a \cn{newtheoremstyle}), it
+%    gets lost if there isn't any text following the heading, since
+%    \cs{deferred@thm@head} packs the heading into an hbox with
+%    \cs{sbox}\cs{@labels}.  Attempting to move the \cs{thmheadnl}
+%    outside the scope of \cs{deferred@thm@head} (just outside the
+%    ending brace below) results in no improvement if no text follows
+%    the heading, and where there is text, runs it in.  Inserting a
+%    space following such a heading results in an extra blank line.
+%    [bnb, 2004/06/30]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \thmheadnl % possibly a newline.
+    \hskip\thm@headsep
+  }%
+  \ignorespaces}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\thm@headsep
+\thm@headsep=5pt plus1pt minus1pt\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\adjust@parskip@nobreak=\@nbitem
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\dth@everypar
+\dth@everypar={%
+  \@minipagefalse \global\@newlistfalse
+  \@noparitemfalse
+  \if@inlabel
+    \global\@inlabelfalse
+    \begingroup \setbox\z@\lastbox
+     \ifvoid\z@ \kern-\itemindent \fi
+    \endgroup
+    \unhbox\@labels
+  \fi
+  \if@nobreak \@nobreakfalse \clubpenalty\@M
+  \else \clubpenalty\@clubpenalty \everypar{}%
+  \fi
+}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\deferred@thm@head#1{%
+  \if@inlabel \indent \par \fi % eject a section head if one is pending
+  \if@nobreak
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    This case normally arises when a theorem follows immediately after
+%    a section head. Then we leave the below-section-head space instead
+%    of adding above-theorem space; but some adjustment of parskip is
+%    needed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \adjust@parskip@nobreak
+  \else
+    \addpenalty\@beginparpenalty
+    \addvspace\@topsep
+    \addvspace{-\parskip}%
+  \fi
+  \global\@inlabeltrue
+  \everypar\dth@everypar
+  \sbox\@labels{\normalfont#1}%
+  \ignorespaces
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\nonslanted}
+%    The \cn{nonslanted} command changes the current font to
+%    \cn{upshape} if it is \cn{itshape} or \cn{slshape}. This is used
+%    for document structure numbers that should be consistently upright
+%    in all contexts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\nonslanted{\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Can't do a direct \cs{ifx} between \cs{f@shape} and \cs{itdefault}
+%    because the latter is \cs{long} (grumble grumble).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@xp\let\@xp\@tempa\csname\f@shape shape\endcsname
+  \ifx\@tempa\itshape\upshape
+  \else\ifx\@tempa\slshape\upshape\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\swapnumbers}
+%    The \cn{swapnumbers} command sets a switch \cs{thm@swap} that is
+%    used by \cn{newtheorem}. To conserve hash table we load
+%    \cs{thm@swap} with two uses; the first one is needed only in
+%    \cn{newtheorem} declarations and the second one is needed only in
+%    typesetting theorem environments.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\swapnumbers{\edef\thm@swap{\if S\thm@swap N\else S\fi}}
+\def\thm@swap{N}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    \cs{@opargbegintheorem} not needed, \cs{@oparg} utility serves
+%    instead.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@opargbegintheorem\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Except for the body font, default values are built into \cs{@thm}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\th@plain{%
+%%  \let\thm@indent\noindent % no indent
+%%  \thm@headfont{\bfseries}% heading font is bold
+%%  \thm@notefont{}% same as heading font
+%%  \thm@headpunct{.}% add period after heading
+%%  \let\thm@swap\@gobble
+%%  \thm@preskip\topsep
+%%  \thm@postskip\theorempreskipamount
+  \itshape % body font
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Theorem style `definition' is the same as `plain' except for the
+%    body font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\th@definition{%
+  \normalfont % body font
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Theorem style `remark' differs from `plain' in head font and  body
+%    font. Also smaller spacing above and below for AMS classes only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\th@remark{%
+%<amsart|amsthm>  \thm@headfont{\itshape}%
+  \normalfont % body font
+%<*amsthm>
+  \thm@preskip\topsep \divide\thm@preskip\tw@
+  \thm@postskip\thm@preskip
+%</amsthm>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The standard definition of \cs{@endtheorem} is just
+%    \cs{endtrivlist}, but that doesn't automatically start a new
+%    paragraph, so we add \cs{@endpefalse} in order to ensure a new
+%    paragraph.  This differs from the basic \latex/ behavior.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist\@endpefalse }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\newtheoremstyle}
+%    An easy way to make a not too complicated variant theorem style.
+%    Usage:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%                   #1
+% \newtheoremstyle{NAME}%
+%     #2          #3          #4
+%   {ABOVESPACE}{BELOWSPACE}{BODYFONT}%
+%     #5      #6        #7         #8
+%   {INDENT}{HEADFONT}{HEADPUNCT}{HEADSPACE}%
+%     #9
+%   {CUSTOM-HEAD-SPEC}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\newtheoremstyle}[9]{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Empty or 0pt for \arg{5} is translated to \cs{noindent}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifempty{#5}{\dimen@\z@skip}{\dimen@#5\relax}%
+  \ifdim\dimen@=\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \arg{4} is body font. Extra code could be included there if
+%    necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \toks@{#4\let\thm@indent\noindent}%
+  \else
+    \toks@{#4\def\thm@indent{\noindent\hbox to#5{}}}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Arg \arg{8} is a glue spec for the space after the head. As
+%    a proper glue spec for `normal interword space' is rather hard to
+%    write, we recognize an argument of |{ }| as a special case and
+%    translate internally to the necessary fontdimen equivalent.
+%    Furthermore, if \arg{8} consists entirely of \cn{newline}, then we
+%    will perform a line break after the theorem head instead of adding
+%    horizontal space. At the moment [1995/01/23] this is not perfectly
+%    well implemented because of complications with the way \latex/'s
+%    \cn{item} adds a heading to the vertical list; for best results
+%    there should not be anything (not even a blank line) after the
+%    |\begin{xxx}| command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@tempa{#8}\ifx\space\@tempa
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Notice that we disregard stretch and shrink for labelsep =
+%    interwordspace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ \thm@headsep\fontdimen\tw@\font\relax}%
+  \else
+    \def\@tempb{\newline}%
+    \ifx\@tempb\@tempa
+      \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ \thm@headsep\z@skip
+        \def\thmheadnl{\newline}}%
+    \else
+      \toks@\@xp{\the\toks@ \thm@headsep#8\relax}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \begingroup
+  \thm@space@setup
+  \@defaultunits\@tempskipa#2\thm@preskip\relax\@nnil
+  \@defaultunits\@tempskipb#3\thm@postskip\relax\@nnil
+  \xdef\@gtempa{\thm@preskip\the\@tempskipa
+    \thm@postskip\the\@tempskipb\relax}%
+  \endgroup
+  \@temptokena\@xp{\@gtempa
+    \thm@headfont{#6}\thm@headpunct{#7}%
+  }%
+  \@ifempty{#9}{%
+    \let\thmhead\thmhead@plain
+  }{%
+    \@namedef{thmhead@#1}##1##2##3{#9}%
+    \@temptokena\@xp{\the\@temptokena
+      \@xp\let\@xp\thmhead\csname thmhead@#1\endcsname}%
+  }%
+  \@xp\xdef\csname th@#1\endcsname{\the\toks@ \the\@temptokena}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\qed}
+%    Define \cn{qed} for end of proof. This command might
+%    occur in math mode, in a displayed equation, but it should never
+%    occur in inner math mode in ordinary paragraph text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qed}{%
+  \ifmmode \mathqed
+  \else
+    \leavevmode\unskip\penalty9999 \hbox{}\nobreak\hfill
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    The hbox is to prevent a line break within the \cn{qedsymbol} if it
+%    is defined to be something composite--- e.g., things like
+%    \verb"(Corollary 1.2) \openbox" as are occasionally done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \quad\hbox{\qedsymbol}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Setup for QED stack. We use a dedicated iterator macro \cs{qed@elt}
+%    instead of the generic \cs{@elt} because the \latex/ output routine
+%    is not safe against changes in \cs{@elt}. Therefore it is not safe
+%    to use \cs{@elt} for any processing that might trigger the output
+%    routine. Although this does not seem very likely when adding a QED
+%    symbol to a horizontal list, we did in fact get a bug report for
+%    this kind of failure.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\QED@stack\@empty
+\let\qed@elt\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Puts a QED symbol on the stack:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\pushQED}[1]{%
+  \toks@{\qed@elt{#1}}\@temptokena\expandafter{\QED@stack}%
+  \xdef\QED@stack{\the\toks@\the\@temptokena}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Pops the QED stack and prints the result.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\popQED}{%
+  \begingroup\let\qed@elt\popQED@elt \QED@stack\relax\relax\endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\popQED@elt#1#2\relax{#1\gdef\QED@stack{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Prints the current QED symbol and replaces the top entry on the
+%    stack with a null entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\qedhere}{%
+  \begingroup \let\mathqed\math@qedhere
+    \let\qed@elt\setQED@elt \QED@stack\relax\relax \endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    In case the \pkg{amsmath} or \pkg{amstext} packages are loaded, we
+%    need the following two tests. (Redundantly declaring them is
+%    harmless.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifmeasuring@
+\newif\iffirstchoice@ \firstchoice@true
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\setQED@elt#1#2\relax{%
+  \ifmeasuring@
+  \else \iffirstchoice@ \gdef\QED@stack{\qed@elt{}#2}\fi
+  \fi
+  #1%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\mathqed}
+%    When a QED occurs inside a math formula, well, it is presumably a
+%    displayed equation. In order to find out where to place the QED
+%    symbol, we need to check what kind of equation structure we are in.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\qed@warning{%
+  \PackageWarning{amsthm}{The \@nx\qedhere command may not work
+    correctly here}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\mathqed}{\quad\hbox{\qedsymbol}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cs{linebox@qed} function comes into play with the \opt{fleqn}
+%    option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\linebox@qed{\hfil\hbox{\qedsymbol}\hfilneg}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Two large sections of code follow. One for \fn{amsmath} 2.0 and one
+%    for plain \latex/.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\math@qedhere{%
+    \@ifundefined{\@currenvir @qed}{%
+      \qed@warning\quad\hbox{\qedsymbol}%
+    }{%
+      \@xp\aftergroup\csname\@currenvir @qed\endcsname
+    }%
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\displaymath@qed{%
+    \relax
+    \ifmmode
+      \ifinner \aftergroup\linebox@qed
+      \else
+        \eqno
+        \let\eqno\relax \let\leqno\relax \let\veqno\relax
+        \hbox{\qedsymbol}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+       \aftergroup\linebox@qed
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@xp\let\csname equation*@qed\endcsname\displaymath@qed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If the equation has both an equation number and a qed, we've got
+%    trouble, but we can provide half-way decent for the simple cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\equation@qed{%
+    \iftagsleft@
+      \hbox{\phantom{\quad\qedsymbol}}%
+      \gdef\alt@tag{%
+        \rlap{\hbox to\displaywidth{\hfil\qedsymbol}}%
+        \global\let\alt@tag\@empty
+      }%
+    \else
+      \gdef\alt@tag{%
+        \global\let\alt@tag\@empty
+        \vtop{\ialign{\hfil####\cr
+                \tagform@\theequation\cr
+                \qedsymbol\cr}}%
+        \setbox\z@
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\qed@tag{%
+    \global\tag@true \nonumber
+    &\omit\setboxz@h {\strut@ \qedsymbol}\tagsleft@false
+    \place@tag@gather
+    \kern-\tabskip
+    \ifst@rred \else \global\@eqnswtrue \fi \global\advance\row@\@ne \cr
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\split@qed{%
+    \def\endsplit{\crcr\egroup \egroup \ctagsplit@false \rendsplit@
+      \aftergroup\align@qed
+    }%
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\align@qed{%
+    \ifmeasuring@ \tag*{\qedsymbol}%
+    \else \let\math@cr@@@\qed@tag
+    \fi
+  }
+  \@xp\let\csname align*@qed\endcsname\align@qed
+  \@xp\let\csname gather*@qed\endcsname\align@qed
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%% Needs some patching up for amsmath 1.2
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}{% end of amsmath branch, start plain LaTeX branch
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cn{qedhere} handling for generic \latex/ classes (\cls{article},
+%    \cls{book}) with the \pkg{amsthm} package (without \pkg{amsmath}) is
+%    fairly sketchy. When a qed symbol and an equation number are both
+%    applied to a single display, the results may not be entirely
+%    satisfactory, particularly when the \opt{fleqn} and/or \opt{leqno}
+%    options are used. [mjd,2000/01/17]
+%
+%    As for \cs{math@qedhere}, it is expected to occur only via
+%    \cn{qedhere}, where the \cs{aftergroup} makes sense.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\math@qedhere{%
+    \@ifundefined{\@currenvir @qed}{%
+      \qed@warning \aftergroup\displaymath@qed
+    }{%
+      \@xp\aftergroup\csname\@currenvir @qed\endcsname
+    }%
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The \cs{ifmmode} \cs{ifinner} case is expected to happen with the
+%    \opt{fleqn} option, where we have something like:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\hbox to\linewidth{\hbox{$...$}\hfil}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    In order to counteract the \cs{hfil} we must jump out two grouping
+%    levels.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\displaymath@qed{%
+    \relax
+    \ifmmode
+      \ifinner \aftergroup\aftergroup\aftergroup\linebox@qed
+      \else
+        \eqno \def\@badmath{$$}%
+        \let\eqno\relax \let\leqno\relax \let\veqno\relax
+        \hbox{\qedsymbol}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+       \aftergroup\linebox@qed
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    This definition is a fallback definition that places the qed and
+%    then the equation number, on the right-hand side. For \opt{leqno},
+%    not so good; but then
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifundefined{ver@leqno.clo}{%
+    \def\equation@qed{\displaymath@qed \quad}%
+  }{%
+    \def\equation@qed{\displaymath@qed}%
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If \pkg{amsmath} is not loaded, then we need to do some surgery
+%    on the \cn{[} macro. Normally it looks like this:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% \[=macro:
+% ->\relax \ifmmode \@badmath \else
+% \ifvmode \nointerlineskip \makebox [.6\linewidth ]\fi $$\fi
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    If arg 2 is \cs{m@th} when we make this test it indicates that the
+%    fleqn option is in effect. Perhaps try to do something there.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\@tempa#1$#2#3\@nil{%
+    \def\[{#1$#2\def\@currenvir{displaymath}#3}%
+  }%
+  \expandafter\@tempa\[\@nil
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If an older version of \pkg{amsmath} is in use, we need to fall
+%    back to a simpler definition of \cs{math@qedhere}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{amstex}{%
+  \def\@tempa{TT}%
+}{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{amsmath}{%
+    \def\@tempb#1 v#2.#3\@nil{#2}%
+    \ifnum\@xp\@xp\@xp\@tempb\csname ver@amsmath.sty\endcsname v0.0\@nil
+       <\tw@
+      \def\@tempa{TT}%
+    \else
+      \def\@tempa{TF}%
+    \fi
+  }{%
+    \def\@tempa{TF}
+  }%
+}
+\if\@tempa
+  \renewcommand{\math@qedhere}{\quad\hbox{\qedsymbol}}%
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The reason that we do not simply use the \cn{square} symbol from
+%    \fn{msam} for the open-box qed symbol is that we want to avoid
+%    requiring users to have the AMSFonts font package. And the \fn{lasy}
+%    \cn{Box} is too large.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\openbox}{\leavevmode
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    I think I got these numbers from measuring \fn{msam}'s \cn{square}
+%    but I forgot to make notes at the time. [mjd,1995/01/25]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \hbox to.77778em{%
+  \hfil\vrule
+  \vbox to.675em{\hrule width.6em\vfil\hrule}%
+  \vrule\hfil}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\textsquare}{%
+  \begingroup \usefont{U}{msa}{m}{n}\thr@@\endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*classes>
+\@ifclasswith{\@classname}{noamsfonts}{%
+  \providecommand{\qedsymbol}{\openbox}%
+}{}
+\providecommand{\qedsymbol}{\textsquare}
+%</classes>
+%<amsthm>\providecommand{\qedsymbol}{\openbox}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The proof environment is never numbered, and has a \cn{qed} at the
+%    end, which makes it inconvenient to use \cn{newtheorem} for
+%    defining it. Also authors frequently need to substitute an
+%    alternative heading text (e.g.\ `Proof of Lemma 4.3')
+%    instead of the default `Proof'. For all these reasons we define the
+%    proof environment here instead of leaving it for authors to define.
+%    Text after the end of a proof, like that after the end of a theorem,
+%    begins a new paragraph.  This differs from basic \latex/ behavior.
+%    [bnb, 1999/09/27]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{proof}[1][\proofname]{\par
+  \pushQED{\qed}%
+  \normalfont \topsep6\p@\@plus6\p@\relax
+  \trivlist
+%<amsbook|amsproc>  \itemindent\normalparindent
+  \item[\hskip\labelsep
+%<amsbook|amsproc>        \scshape
+%<amsart|amsthm>        \itshape
+    #1\@addpunct{.}]\ignorespaces
+}{%
+  \popQED\endtrivlist\@endpefalse
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Default for \cn{proofname}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\proofname}{Proof}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    For reference:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% From: tycchow@math.mit.edu (Timothy Y. Chow)
+% Subject: Suppressing theorem numbering in LaTeX
+% Message-ID: <1994Aug11.234754.22523@galois.mit.edu>
+% Date: Thu, 11 Aug 94 23:47:54 GMT
+% To: tex-news@SHSU.EDU
+%
+% A friend of mine wants numbering of theorems, conjectures, and so on
+% suppressed if there is only one of them in his article.  In other words
+% he wants "Conjecture 1" to appear as simply "Conjecture" if there is no
+% Conjecture 2.  What is the best way to go about doing this?
+% ...
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    Maybe something clever can be done to make the desired behavior
+%    happen automatically. Note that this would seem to be a general
+%    numbering problem rather than a theorem-specific one, because
+%    similar behavior would be desirable for appendixes: according to
+%    standard publishing practice, if there's only one it is titled just
+%    `Appendix', and if there are more than one they are titled
+%    `Appendix A', `Appendix B', and so on.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</amsthm|classes>
+%<*classes>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Utility commands used with AMS author packages}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\bb@skip}
+%    Skip to result in base-to-base distance from previous to next box.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bb@skip#1{%
+  \skip@#1\relax \advance\skip@-\prevdepth \advance\skip@-\baselineskip
+  \vskip\skip@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\markleft}
+%    Basic \latex/ has \cn{markright} and \cn{markboth}, but sometimes
+%    it's necessary to change just the left running head.  This macro
+%    completes the set.  From the \pkg{altxext.sty} module of Klaus
+%    Lagally's \pkg{arabtex}.  [bnb, 2004/03/25]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\markleft#1{{\let\protect\noexpand
+    \let\label\relax \let\index\relax \let\glossary\relax
+    \expandafter\@markleft\@themark{#1}%
+    \mark{\@themark}}%
+  \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+\def\@markleft#1#2#3{\gdef\@themark{{#3}{#2}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\DH}
+%  \begin{macro}{\dh}
+%  \begin{macro}{\DJ}
+%  \begin{macro}{\dj}
+%    The Icelandic thorn and eth and the Croatian barred D are part of
+%    the T1 font encoding, but aren't available in OT1.  However, they
+%    are needed (rarely) in the author names or bibliographies.  Provide
+%    emulations, using the thorn in \fn{msbm} or D's barred with a macron.
+%    The lowercase eth requires an \cs{edef} to access \fn{msbm} properly.
+%    Define it separately to permit checking for small caps.  [bnb, 2004/04/05]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@tempa{}
+\edef\@dh{%
+  \noexpand\mathhexbox{\hexnumber@\symAMSb}67}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\dh}{OT1}{%
+  \edef\@tempb{\scdefault}%
+  \ifx\f@shape\@tempb
+    \leavevmode
+    \raisebox{-.8ex}{\makebox[\z@][l]{\hskip-.08em\accent"16\hss}}d%
+  \else
+    \@dh
+  \fi
+}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\DH}{OT1}{%
+  \leavevmode\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[\z@][l]{\hskip-.07em\accent"16\hss}}D}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\DJ}{OT1}{%
+  \leavevmode\raisebox{-.5ex}{\makebox[\z@][l]{\hskip-.07em\accent"16\hss}}D}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\dj}{OT1}{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\f@shape}\edef\@tempb{\scdefault}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
+    \leavevmode
+    \raisebox{-.75ex}{\makebox[\z@][l]{\hskip-.08em\accent"16\hss}}d%
+  \else
+    \leavevmode\raisebox{.02ex}{\makebox[\z@][l]{\hskip.1em\accent"16\hss}}d%
+  \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \subsection{Hyphenation exceptions}
+%    Some common hyphenation exceptions, based on the listing in
+%    TUGboat vol 10, no 3, November 1989, pp.~336--341. Many words from
+%    the TUGboat list that seemed less likely to occur in mathematical
+%    text have been omitted because hyphenation exceptions use up memory
+%    (most versions of \tex/ currently have a limit of 307 on hyphenation
+%    exceptions; each added hyphenation exception uses up something like
+%    2 extra words of main memory as well). The list of hyphenations for
+%    proper names could be expanded forever if room permitted; we
+%    restrict ourselves to a rather short, extremely arbitrary list.
+%    Note that the hyphenation rules of British English differ in some
+%    particulars from the US rules, so some of the hyphenations
+%    given below may need to be overridden for proper UK hyphenation.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\hyphenation{acad-e-my acad-e-mies af-ter-thought anom-aly anom-alies
+an-ti-deriv-a-tive an-tin-o-my an-tin-o-mies apoth-e-o-ses
+apoth-e-o-sis ap-pen-dix ar-che-typ-al as-sign-a-ble as-sist-ant-ship
+as-ymp-tot-ic asyn-chro-nous at-trib-uted at-trib-ut-able bank-rupt
+bank-rupt-cy bi-dif-fer-en-tial blue-print busier busiest
+cat-a-stroph-ic cat-a-stroph-i-cally con-gress cross-hatched data-base
+de-fin-i-tive de-riv-a-tive dis-trib-ute dri-ver dri-vers eco-nom-ics
+econ-o-mist elit-ist equi-vari-ant ex-quis-ite ex-tra-or-di-nary
+flow-chart for-mi-da-ble forth-right friv-o-lous ge-o-des-ic
+ge-o-det-ic geo-met-ric griev-ance griev-ous griev-ous-ly
+hexa-dec-i-mal ho-lo-no-my ho-mo-thetic ideals idio-syn-crasy
+in-fin-ite-ly in-fin-i-tes-i-mal ir-rev-o-ca-ble key-stroke
+lam-en-ta-ble light-weight mal-a-prop-ism man-u-script mar-gin-al
+meta-bol-ic me-tab-o-lism meta-lan-guage me-trop-o-lis
+met-ro-pol-i-tan mi-nut-est mol-e-cule mono-chrome mono-pole
+mo-nop-oly mono-spline mo-not-o-nous mul-ti-fac-eted mul-ti-plic-able
+non-euclid-ean non-iso-mor-phic non-smooth par-a-digm par-a-bol-ic
+pa-rab-o-loid pa-ram-e-trize para-mount pen-ta-gon phe-nom-e-non
+post-script pre-am-ble pro-ce-dur-al pro-hib-i-tive pro-hib-i-tive-ly
+pseu-do-dif-fer-en-tial pseu-do-fi-nite pseu-do-nym qua-drat-ic
+quad-ra-ture qua-si-smooth qua-si-sta-tion-ary qua-si-tri-an-gu-lar
+quin-tes-sence quin-tes-sen-tial re-arrange-ment rec-tan-gle
+ret-ri-bu-tion retro-fit retro-fit-ted right-eous right-eous-ness
+ro-bot ro-bot-ics sched-ul-ing se-mes-ter semi-def-i-nite
+semi-ho-mo-thet-ic set-up se-vere-ly side-step sov-er-eign spe-cious
+spher-oid spher-oid-al star-tling star-tling-ly sta-tis-tics
+sto-chas-tic straight-est strange-ness strat-a-gem strong-hold
+sum-ma-ble symp-to-matic syn-chro-nous topo-graph-i-cal tra-vers-a-ble
+tra-ver-sal tra-ver-sals treach-ery turn-around un-at-tached
+un-err-ing-ly white-space wide-spread wing-spread wretch-ed
+wretch-ed-ly Eng-lish Euler-ian Feb-ru-ary Gauss-ian
+Hamil-ton-ian Her-mit-ian Jan-u-ary Japan-ese Kor-te-weg
+Le-gendre Mar-kov-ian Noe-ther-ian No-vem-ber Rie-mann-ian Sep-tem-ber}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \subsection{Initialization}
+%    We define a function to do the normal calculations that we want for
+%    \cn{textheight} and \cn{textwidth}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\calclayout}
+%    Subtract the height of the running heads:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\calclayout{\advance\textheight -\headheight
+  \advance\textheight -\headsep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We set \cn{oddsidemargin} and \cn{evensidemargin} to
+%    center the text on the page.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \oddsidemargin\paperwidth
+  \advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth
+  \divide\oddsidemargin\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now we subtract the default margin provided by standard DVI
+%    drivers.  But first we make sure that the final margin will
+%    be at least .5 inch.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim\oddsidemargin<.5truein \oddsidemargin.5truein \fi
+  \advance\oddsidemargin -1truein
+  \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%     And we set \cn{topmargin} to get vertical centering as well.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \topmargin\paperheight \advance\topmargin -\textheight
+  \advance\topmargin -\headheight \advance\topmargin -\headsep
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Height of running foot ignored: not present.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \divide\topmargin\tw@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We provide a minimum of .5in (after compensating for the default
+%    margin---see next step).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifdim\topmargin<.5truein \topmargin.5truein \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Now subtract the default margin provided by standard DVI
+%    drivers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \advance\topmargin -1truein\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    Initialize the dimensions, page numbering, etc.  For inhouse use,
+%    administrative stuff is isolated in separate files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsart>\InputIfFileExists{amsart.cfg}{}{%
+%<amsproc>\InputIfFileExists{amsproc.cfg}{}{%
+%<amsbook>\InputIfFileExists{amsbook.cfg}{}{%
+  \calclayout % initialize
+  \pagenumbering{arabic}%
+  \pagestyle{headings}%
+  \thispagestyle{plain}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    If we are in compatibility mode, add some backward compatibility
+%    stuff below. Otherwise quit here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\if@compatibility \else\endinput\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Compensate for changed meaning of \cn{tiny}:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\tiny{\Tiny}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The macro \cn{defaultfont} was provided in version 1.1 of amsart;
+%    retained for compatibility as a synonym of \cn{normalfont}. Resets
+%    everything except for size.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\defaultfont{\normalfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Macro for making non-slanted numbers and punctuation in italic
+%    or slanted text.  This is to avoid visual inconsistencies
+%    between numbers or parentheses in math and adjacent numbers or
+%    parentheses in text.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\rom{\textup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    For backward compatibility with version 1.1 of \cls{amsart}, we
+%    define \env{pf}, \env{pf*} environments. And undefine \cn{proof}
+%    just in case an existing document contains a \cn{newenvironment} or
+%    \cn{newcommand} for it, as that would now cause an error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@newpf\proof \let\proof\relax \let\endproof\relax
+\newenvironment{pf}{\@newpf[\proofname]}{\popQED\endtrivlist}
+\newenvironment{pf*}[1]{\@newpf[#1]}{\popQED\endtrivlist}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The usual \cn{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+%    the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+%</classes>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1995/02/01}{Added global init for @secnumber}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1995/02/01}{Made psamsfonts option pass cmex10 to
+%   amsmath}
+% \changes{v1.2a}{1995/02/01}{Added missing endpar after authors in
+%   amsbook @maketitle}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/20}{Improve handling of abstract}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/20}{Allow titlepage option for articles}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/20}{Suppress logo and copyright info for
+%   generic AMS classes}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/20}{Use `Date' instead of `Received by...' in
+%   the generic AMS classes}
+%
+% \changes{v2.13}{2002/12/06}{Added a warning for thanks inside author}
+%
+% \CheckSum{5682}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsdtx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsdtx.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cd9bb13b2c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsdtx.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,1192 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsdtx.dtx",
+%%%   version   = "2.06",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/06",
+%%%   time      = "12:18:49 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "19929 1192 3506 39423",
+%%%   author    = "Michael J. Downes, updated by David M. Jones",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1996, 1999, 2004
+%%%                American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, amslatex, ams-latex, user documentation",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This is the source for two document classes, amsdtx
+%%%                and amsldoc, used to produce AMS user documentation
+%%%                or technical documentation.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+% \iffalse
+%    The following section of code makes this file self-printable.
+%<*driver>
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\newcommand{\rp}{\let\PBS\\\raggedright\let\\\PBS}
+
+\makeindex
+
+\CodelineIndex
+
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \cls{amsldoc} and \cls{amsdtx} document classes}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\Michael Downes\\
+  updated by David M. Jones}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\hDocInput{amsdtx.dtx}
+\PrintIndex
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+%^^A If this file is printed by itself the \fileversion and \filedate
+%^^A information will come from the file header rather than from the
+%^^A \ProvidesClass command. See \hDocInput.
+% \maketitle
+%
+%    \tableofcontents
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+% \section{Introduction}
+%    This file is the source for two documentclasses, \cls{amsldoc}
+%    (used for the \amslatex/ user's guide) and \cls{amsdtx} (used for
+%    printing AMS \fn{.dtx} files). The generic \cls{book} class is used
+%    as a base, but the \cls{amsdtx} class is modified to serve as an
+%    article-type class. This affects the form of documentation files
+%    mainly in the use of \cn{maketitle} and \cn{chapter}.
+%
+% \begin{table}
+% \caption{Features of the \cls{amsldoc} and \cls{amsdtx} classes}
+% \newcommand{\rpth}{\rp{.75}}
+% \centering
+% \begin{tabular}{lp{.65\columnwidth}}
+% Command Name& Purpose\\
+% \hline
+% \cn{cn}& \rp To print a user command name: \verb"\cn{title}"; leading
+%   backslash can be optionally included for control symbols:
+%   \verb"\cn{\%}". The \cn{cn} command works properly even in macro
+%   arguments (compare to, e.g., \cn{verb}\verb"'\newif'"). But beware
+%   of a fragile control symbol (are there any?) in a moving argument.\\
+% \cn{cs}& \rp `Control sequence': to print an internal command name,
+%   not intended for the end user\\
+% \cn{env}& \rp To print an environment name: \verb"\env{table}"\\
+% \cn{pkg}& \rp To print a package name: \verb"\pkg{eufrak}"\\
+% \cn{cls}& \rp To print a class name: \verb"\cls{book}"\\
+% \cn{opt}& \rp To print the name of a class or package option:
+%   \verb"\opt{twocolumn}"\\
+% \cn{bst}& \rp To print the name of a \bibtex/ style
+%   \verb"\bst{amsalpha}"\\
+% \cn{fn}& \rp To print a file name or font name: \verb"\fn{T1enc.def}",
+%   \verb"\fn{cmsy10}"\\
+% \cn{fnt}& \rp To print a font name: \verb"\fn{cmsy10}" \\
+% \cn{cnt}& \rp To print a counter name: \verb"\fn{topnumber}" \\
+% \cn{qc}& \rp To quote a single character: \verb"\qc{\%}";
+%   this works properly for special characters, even in macro
+%   arguments, unlike e.g., \verb"\verb'%'"\\
+% \cn{latex/} etc.& \rp Convenient forms of \cn{LaTeX}, \cn{TeX},
+%   \cn{BibTeX}, etc. that are easier to type and have a trailing slash
+%   to eliminate the following-space problem (without needing different
+%   markup in different contexts)
+% \end{tabular}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%    Standard starting pieces. (Note: the reason each \cn{ProvidesClass}
+%    command is placed on a line by itself, with separate begin and end
+%    guards for docstripping, is to make automatic update of file date
+%    and version slightly easier and more robust.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1995/06/01]% LaTeX date must be June 1995 or later
+%<*amsldoc>
+\ProvidesClass{amsldoc}[2004/08/06 v2.06]
+%</amsldoc>
+%<*amsdtx>
+\ProvidesClass{amsdtx}[2004/08/06 v2.06]
+%</amsdtx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%    Start with the generic book class as a base.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{book}}
+\ProcessOptions
+\LoadClass{book}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{url.sty}{%
+    \RequirePackage{url}\relax
+    \@gobble
+}{%
+    \@firstofone
+}
+{
+    \DeclareRobustCommand{\url}[1]{%
+        \def\@tempa{#1}%
+        \texttt{\urlsetup $\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@tempa$}%
+    }%
+    \def\urlsetup{%
+        \check@mathfonts \textfont\@ne\the\font \textfont\z@\the\font
+        \urlfix +\urlfix\=\urlfix\:\urlfix\-\urlfix\.\urlfix\,\urlfix\;%
+        \urlbreak\&\urlbreak\/\urlbreak\?%
+    }%
+    \def\urlbreak#1{%
+        \mathcode`#1="8000
+        \begingroup \lccode`\~=`#1 \lowercase{\endgroup \edef~}%
+        {\mathchar\number`#1\penalty\hyphenpenalty}%
+    }%
+    \def\urlfix#1{%
+        \mathcode`#1=`#1\relax
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand{\qq}[1]{\textquotedblleft#1\/\textquotedblright}
+\providecommand{\mdash}{\textemdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty}
+\providecommand{\ndash}{\textendash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\@xp\expandafter
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \section{Indexing primitives}
+%
+%    Unlike \pkg{amsdtx}, \pkg{amsldoc} doesn't load the \pkg{doc}
+%    package, so we need to provide the following logical names.  The
+%    values are consistent with \fn{makeindex}'s default conventions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\def\actualchar{@}
+\def\quotechar{"}
+\def\levelchar{!}
+\def\encapchar{|}
+\def\verbatimchar{+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We also need the \cs{ifcodeline@index} switch.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifcodeline@index
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\autoindex}
+%    When generating a codeline index, this encapsulates the page
+%    number in italics.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\autoindex}[1]{%
+    \index{#1\ifcodeline@index\encapchar usage\fi}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\ntt}
+%    To avoid font substitution warnings we make the tt font always
+%    print in the normal weight and shape.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\ntt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\indexcs}
+%    Index a control sequence without printing it. Note
+%    non-long. The \cs{@nobslash} strips off an optional leading
+%    backslash before passing the control sequence name to
+%    \cs{@indexcs}.  This means that |\indexcs{\cs}| and
+%    |\indexcs{cs}| produce the same index entry.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\indexcs}[1]{%
+    \@xp\@xp\@xp\@indexcs\@xp\@nobslash\string#1\@nil
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\@indexcs}
+%    Given |cs| as an argument, this writes something like
+%    |cs@\verb"*+\cs+| to the \fn{.idx} file (or |cs=\verb!*+\cs+| if
+%    using \fn{doc.sty}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@indexcs#1\@nil{%
+    \autoindex{#1\actualchar
+        \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar
+            \@xp\@bothoftwo\string\ #1\@empty
+        \verbatimchar
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\@bothoftwo}
+%    This has the effect of removing spaces before each of the
+%    arguments.  In particular, it removes the space generated by
+%    \verb*+\string\ + above.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@bothoftwo#1#2{#1#2}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\category@index}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\category@index#1#2{%
+    {\ntt#2}%
+    \@category@index{#1}{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\@category@index}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@category@index#1#2{%
+    \autoindex{%
+        #2\actualchar\string\texttt{#2}%
+        \ifx\@nil#1\@nil\else\space#1\fi
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    Some functions to support \cn{cn} etc. For most of these commands
+%    we don't really want them to be \cs{long}! But in some early
+%    releases of \LaTeXe\ the \verb'*' form of \cn{newcommand} was not
+%    yet available.
+%
+%    We use the name \cn{bslchar} instead of \cn{bslash} to avoid
+%    potential conflict with the \pkg{doc} package \cn{bslash} command.
+%    Unlike \cn{bslash}, \cn{bslchar} survives unlimited
+%    writing/expansion because it is a chardef.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\chardef\bslchar=`\\ % p. 424, TeXbook
+\newcommand{\addbslash}{\expandafter\@addbslash\string}
+\def\@addbslash#1{\bslchar\@nobslash#1}
+\newcommand{\nobslash}{\expandafter\@nobslash\string}
+\def\@nobslash#1{\ifnum`#1=\bslchar\else#1\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@boxorbreak}
+%    Start up for a \cn{cs} or \cn{cn} command, adds an \cs{hbox} if in
+%    math, or an allowbreak penalty if the preceding item is not a space.
+%    (In case two such commands are used side-by-side.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@boxorbreak{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \ifmmode\hbox\else\ifdim\lastskip=\z@\penalty9999 \fi\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    Control sequence. The function \cn{addbslash} makes this command
+%    also usable for some special control sequences like \cn{\%} \cn{\}}
+%    \cn{\{}: instead of writing |\cs{%}| which doesn't work, you can
+%    write |\cs{\%}|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cs}[1]{%
+    \@boxorbreak{%
+        \ntt
+        \addbslash#1\@empty
+        \@xp\@xp\@xp\@indexcs\@xp\@nobslash\string#1\@nil
+    }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Allow distinguishing non-private `command names' that will be
+%    visible to the user from internal (mostly private) `control
+%    sequences'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\cn\cs
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The following items should not normally appear in math mode so they
+%    don't need to call \cs{@boxorbreak}.
+%
+%    \latex/ documentclass name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cls}{\category@index{class}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \latex/ package name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\pkg}{\category@index{package}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \latex/ option name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\opt}{\category@index{option}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Environment name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsdtx>\DeclareRobustCommand{\env}[1]{{\ntt#1}\SpecialEnvIndex{#1}}
+%<amsldoc>\DeclareRobustCommand{\env}{\category@index{environment}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    File name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\fn}{\category@index{}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \bibtex/ style.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\bst}{\category@index{\string\BibTeX{} style}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cnt}{\category@index{counter}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\fnt}{\category@index{font}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    With long command names or file names we sometimes prefer to allow
+%    hyphenation in the tt font (in combination with suitable
+%    \cn{hyphenation} statements for individual documents). To make this
+%    work we must turn off the feature of \latex/ that disables the
+%    hyphenchar of the tt fonts.
+%
+%    The method shown here depends on the assumption that OT1 encoding
+%    will be used for the tt fonts. An encoding-independent method would
+%    be more awkward: You'd have to explicitly load the relevant
+%    fonts, let's say by using \cn{AtBeginDocument}, and undo the
+%    hyphenchar change individually for each font.
+%
+%    Instead we force loading, or possibly reloading (depending on the
+%    preload options used locally for creating the \latex/ format file),
+%    of the \fn{OT1/cmtt} fd file, and then clear the macro
+%    \cs{OT1+cmtt} which contains code to execute whenever a font of
+%    this family is first loaded. The default value is to turn off the
+%    hyphenchar, and that's what we don't want.
+%
+%    This method is not especially palatable but other methods that
+%    don't involve loading the fd file are significantly less reliable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\allowtthyphens{\begingroup
+  \fontencoding{OT1}\fontfamily{cmtt}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Undefine the csname that \cs{try@load@fontshape} tests to determine
+%    whether the fd file needs loading. Then call
+%    \cs{try@load@fontshape}. Then we can remove the `turn off
+%    hyphenation' code, which as it happens resides in the same csname
+%    that was tested.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\let\csname OT1+cmtt\endcsname\relax
+  \try@load@fontshape
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\let\csname OT1+cmtt\endcsname\@empty
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We allow some slop at the right margin because we have some
+%    long control sequence names and verbatim text to deal with. Also
+%    ignore underfull hboxes and vboxes unless they are really bad.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\hfuzz2pc
+\vbadness9999 \hbadness5000
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AmS{{\protect\usefont{OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}%
+  A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125emS}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\latex/{{\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\amslatex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\tex/{{\protect\TeX}}
+\def\amstex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\TeX}}
+\def\bibtex/{{Bib\protect\TeX}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \cn{makeindex} command is already used for other purposes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\makeindx/{MakeIndex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Don't allow a break after the hyphen:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\xypic/{XY\mbox{-}pic}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\Textures}{\textit{Textures}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    `Meta' macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\<#1>{\textit{$\langle$#1\/$\rangle$}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Reduce itemsep in lists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@listi{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmargini
+  \topsep 3\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \parsep \p@ \@plus\p@ \itemsep\parsep
+}
+\let\@listI\@listi
+\@listi
+\def\@listii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep\p@\@plus\p@ \@minus\p@
+  \parsep\z@skip \itemsep\z@skip
+}
+\def\@listiii{%
+  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+  \topsep\z@skip \parsep\z@skip \itemsep\z@skip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    An environment to encapsulate remarks relevant to old versions but
+%    not essential for the current version.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{histnote}{%
+  \trivlist\item[\hspace{\labelsep}\bfseries Historical Note:]%
+}{%
+  \endtrivlist
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Turn off \cs{autoindex} during \cn{tableofcontents} or similar.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@starttoc#1{\begingroup
+  \let\autoindex\@gobble
+  \makeatletter
+  \@input{\jobname.#1}\if@filesw
+  \expandafter\newwrite\csname tf@#1\endcsname
+             \immediate\openout
+                 \csname tf@#1\endcsname \jobname.#1\relax
+  \fi \global\@nobreakfalse \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Make glossary commands a no-op for the moment. [mjd,1994/10/03]
+%    Provide a \cn{secref} command for section references.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\newcommand{\gloss}[1]{}
+%</amsldoc>
+\newcommand*{\secref}[1]{\S\ref{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    We can write |\qc{\%}| to quote a single
+%    character in situations where |\verb"%"| would not work, mainly
+%    when text is read as a macro argument (e.g., footnotes).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\qc}[1]{}% check for prior definition
+\edef\qc#1{\noexpand\protect\expandafter\noexpand\csname qc \endcsname
+  \noexpand\protect#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For this function the first argument is \cn{protect} and just needs
+%    to be discarded. The method for removing a leading backslash is to
+%    turn off \cs{escapechar}; this is more forgiving of variations like
+%    |\qc{$}|. If the argument is `|\ |' we print a cmtt visible-space
+%    character, \qc{\ }.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@namedef{qc }#1#2{\begingroup\ntt
+  \ifx\ #2\char`\ \else\escapechar\m@ne\string#2\fi\endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Declare a few character names to avoid e.g., indexing difficulties.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qcat}{\qc\@}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qcamp}{\qc\&}%
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\qcbang}{\qc\!}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\arg}
+%    Change \cn{arg} to print a macro argument number:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\arg}[1]{{\ntt\##1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    We need to emulate the \pkg{amsthm} \cn{qedsymbol} for the
+%    \amslatex/ user's guide.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\newcommand{\openbox}{\leavevmode
+  \hbox to.77778em{%
+  \hfil\vrule
+  \vbox to.675em{\hrule width.6em\vfil\hrule}%
+  \vrule\hfil}}
+\newcommand{\qedsymbol}{\openbox}
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Logical markup for e-mail address:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsldoc>\def\mail{\texttt}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Shorthand for indexing:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\def\*#1{\def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{*}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb \expandafter\index
+  \else #1\index{#1}\fi}
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Non-indexed \cn{cn} (maybe call this |\cn*|?)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ncn#1{{\let\index\@gobble\cn{#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Indexing difficulties with !, @.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cnbang}{%
+  \ncn{\!}\index{"!@{\ntt\bslchar\qcbang}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cnat}{%
+  \ncn{\!}\index{"@@{\ntt\bslchar\qcat}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Shorthand for a discouraged, but not forbidden, line break:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\5{\penalty500 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Environment for error message examples. Use \cs{meaning} to allow
+%    reading the error message text as an ordinary brace-delimited arg
+%    but still be able to print embedded braces; and first change the
+%    backslash catcode to prevent extra spaces after control words.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\newenvironment{error}{%
+  \begingroup\catcode`\\=12 \expandafter\endgroup\errora
+}{%
+  \endtrivlist
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\errora}[1]{%
+  \trivlist
+  \item[\hskip\labelsep\errorbullet\enspace
+    \ntt\frenchspacing\def\@tempa{#1}%
+    \expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\@tempa]\leavevmode\par
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \cs{errorbullet} is just an attempt at a simple graphic device that
+%    doesn't require any special fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\errorbullet}{\rule[-.5pt]{2.5pt}{7.5pt}%
+  \rule[-.5pt]{5pt}{2.5pt}\kern-2.5pt%
+  \rule[4.5pt]{2.5pt}{2.5pt}}
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    A couple of subheading commands:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\errexa}{\par\noindent\textit{Example}:\ }
+\newcommand{\errexpl}{\par\noindent\textit{Explanation}:\ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% \section{\cls{amsldoc} style modifications for sectioning commands}
+%    The following section deals with book commands (part, chapter,
+%    frontmatter, \dots).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Modifications of sectioning commands from \fn{book.cls}, mostly
+%    reducing font sizes and vertical spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\frontmatter{\clearpage
+            \@mainmatterfalse\pagenumbering{roman}}
+\renewcommand\mainmatter{\clearpage
+       \@mainmattertrue\pagenumbering{arabic}}
+\renewcommand\backmatter{\clearpage \@mainmatterfalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\part{\clearpage
+                 \thispagestyle{plain}%
+                 \if@twocolumn
+                     \onecolumn
+                     \@tempswatrue
+                   \else
+                     \@tempswafalse
+                 \fi
+                 \hbox{}\vfil
+                 \secdef\@part\@spart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+      \refstepcounter{part}%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+    \else
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+    \fi
+    \markboth{}{}%
+    {\centering
+     \interlinepenalty \@M
+     \reset@font
+     \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+       \Large\bfseries \partname~\thepart
+       \par
+       \vskip 20\p@
+     \fi
+     \Large \bfseries #2\par}%
+    \@endpart}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@spart#1{%
+    {\centering
+     \interlinepenalty \@M
+     \reset@font
+     \Large \bfseries #1\par}%
+    \@endpart}
+\def\@endpart{\vfil\newpage
+              \if@twoside
+                \hbox{}%
+                \thispagestyle{empty}%
+                \newpage
+              \fi
+              \if@tempswa
+                \twocolumn
+              \fi}
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\chapter{\par \@afterindentfalse
+                    \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+                       \if@mainmatter
+                         \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+                         \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
+                                   {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+                       \else
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}\fi
+                    \else
+                      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}
+                    \fi
+                    \chaptermark{#1}%
+                    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+                    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+                    \if@twocolumn
+                      \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+                    \else
+                      \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+                      \@afterheading
+                    \fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+  \vspace{1.5\baselineskip}%
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \reset@font
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \large\bfseries \@chapapp\space\thechapter
+      \par\nobreak
+      \vskip.5\baselineskip\relax
+    \fi
+    #1\par\nobreak
+    \vskip\baselineskip
+  }}
+\def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+                   \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+                 \else
+                   \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+                   \@afterheading
+                 \fi}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+  \vspace*{1.5\baselineskip}%
+  {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
+    \reset@font
+    \large \bfseries  #1\par\nobreak
+    \vskip\baselineskip
+  }}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Add Donald Arseneau's \cs{@removefromreset}; used to decouple the
+%    footnote counter from \cn{chapter}, since chapters here do not
+%    automatically start on a new page.  [bnb, 1999/09/27]
+%  \begin{verbatim}
+%    \@removefromreset{FOO}{BAR} : Removes counter FOO from the list of
+%                       counters \cl@BAR to be reset when counter BAR
+%                       is stepped.  The opposite of \@addtoreset.
+%  \end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@removefromreset#1#2{\let\@tempb\@elt
+   \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname c@#1\endcsname
+   \def\@elt##1{\expandafter\ifx\csname c@##1\endcsname\@tempa\else
+         \noexpand\@elt{##1}\fi}%
+   \expandafter\edef\csname cl@#2\endcsname{\csname cl@#2\endcsname}%
+   \let\@elt\@tempb}
+\@removefromreset{footnote}{chapter}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Change running head font to \cn{footnotesize}, nonslanted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ps@headings{%
+  \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+  \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil{\footnotesize\leftmark{}{}}}%
+  \def\@oddhead{{\footnotesize\rightmark{}{}}\hfil\thepage}%
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\chaptermark##1{%
+    \markboth {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \if@mainmatter
+        \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ \fi
+      \fi
+        ##1}}{}}%
+  \def\sectionmark##1{%
+    \markright {\uppercase{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
+        \thesection. \ \fi
+        ##1}}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \section{\cls{amsdtx} style modifications for sectioning commands}
+%    These definitions for \cn{maketitle} are from \fn{article.cls}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsdtx>
+\renewcommand\maketitle{\par
+  \begingroup
+    \renewcommand\thefootnote{\fnsymbol{footnote}}%
+    \def\@makefnmark{\hbox to\z@{$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$\hss}}%
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent
+            \hbox to1.8em{\hss$\m@th^{\@thefnmark}$}##1}%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
+        \@maketitle
+      \else
+        \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \newpage
+      \global\@topnum\z@   % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
+      \@maketitle
+    \fi
+    \thispagestyle{plain}\@thanks
+  \endgroup
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+  \let\thanks\relax
+  \let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
+  \gdef\@thanks{}\gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}}
+%
+\def\@maketitle{%
+  \newpage
+  \null
+  \vskip 2em%
+  \begin{center}%
+    {\LARGE \@title \par}%
+    \vskip 1.5em%
+    {\large
+      \lineskip .5em%
+      \begin{tabular}[t]{c}%
+        \@author
+      \end{tabular}\par}%
+    \vskip 1em%
+    {\large \@date}%
+  \end{center}%
+  \par
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Put the title into both running heads.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \uppercase\expandafter{\expandafter\toks@\expandafter{\@title}}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\markboth{\the\toks@}{\the\toks@}}%
+  \@tempa
+  \vskip 1.5em}
+%</amsdtx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Edit the table of contents.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsdtx>
+\renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+    \else
+      \@restonecolfalse
+    \fi
+    \subsection*{\contentsname}%
+    \@starttoc{toc}%
+    \if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi
+    }
+%</amsdtx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Edit the sectioning commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection {section}{1}{\z@}%
+                                   {-.6\baselineskip \@plus -3\p@}%
+                                   {.4\baselineskip}
+%<amsdtx>                          {\reset@font\Large\bfseries}}
+%<amsldoc>                         {\reset@font\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+                                     {-.3\baselineskip\@plus -2\p@}%
+                                     {.2\baselineskip}%
+%<amsdtx>                          {\reset@font\large\bfseries}}
+%<amsldoc>                         {\reset@font\normalsize\bfseries}}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+                                     {-.2\baselineskip\@plus -2\p@}%
+                                     {.2\baselineskip}%
+                                     {\reset@font\normalsize\bfseries}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Change index environment to turn off \cn{autoindex}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{theindex}{%
+  \if@twocolumn \@restonecolfalse \else \@restonecoltrue \fi
+  \columnseprule \z@ \columnsep 35\p@
+  \let\autoindex\@gobble
+%<amsdtx>  \twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
+%<amsldoc>  \twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
+  \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}%
+  \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}%
+  \thispagestyle{plain}\parindent\z@
+  \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+  \let\item\@idxitem
+}{%
+  \if@restonecol\onecolumn\else\clearpage\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Take out \cn{thechapter} from \cn{thesection}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<amsdtx>\renewcommand{\thesection}{\arabic{section}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Change the style of captions slightly. Also incorporate some
+%    caption improvements from Donald Arseneau (\fn{comp.text.tex}, 11
+%    Oct 1994).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \addvspace\abovecaptionskip
+  \begingroup
+    \countdef\@parcycles=8 % local count register
+    \@parcycles\z@
+    \@setpar{\advance\@parcycles\@ne \ifnum\@parcycles>999
+      \@@par\@parcycles\z@\fi
+      \ifhmode \unskip\hskip\parfillskip\penalty-\@M\fi}%
+    \@hangfrom{\textbf{#1.} }\vadjust{\penalty\m@ne}#2%
+  \endgroup
+  \ifhmode\unpenalty\fi\par
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=\m@ne % only one line in the caption
+    \unpenalty \setbox\@tempboxa\lastbox
+    \nointerlineskip
+    \hbox to\hsize{\hfill\unhbox\@tempboxa\unskip\hfill}%
+  \fi
+  \nobreak\vskip\belowcaptionskip
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    For table captions, assume top captions and so put space below the
+%    caption rather than above:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewenvironment{table}{%
+  \belowcaptionskip\abovecaptionskip \abovecaptionskip\z@skip
+  \@float{table}%
+}{%
+  \end@float
+}
+\renewenvironment{table*}{%
+  \belowcaptionskip\abovecaptionskip \abovecaptionskip\z@skip
+  \@dblfloat{table}%
+}{%
+  \end@dblfloat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{Float placement parameters}
+%    These control the placing of floating objects like tables and
+%    figures. The values here, which are much more tolerant than the
+%    \latex/ defaults, are more or less copied from \fn{amsclass.dtx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\setcounter{topnumber}{4}\setcounter{bottomnumber}{4}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
+\renewcommand{\topfraction}{.97}\renewcommand{\bottomfraction}{.97}
+\renewcommand{\textfraction}{.03}\renewcommand{\floatpagefraction}{.9}
+\renewcommand{\dbltopfraction}{.97}
+\renewcommand{\dblfloatpagefraction}{.9}
+\setlength{\floatsep}{8pt plus6pt}
+\setlength{\textfloatsep}{10pt plus8pt}
+\setlength{\intextsep}{8pt plus6pt}
+\setlength{\dblfloatsep}{8pt plus6pt}
+\setlength{\dbltextfloatsep}{10pt plus8pt}
+\setlength{\@fptop}{0pt}\setlength{\@fpsep}{8pt}%
+\setlength{\@fpbot}{0pt plus 1fil}
+\setlength{\@dblfptop}{0pt}\setlength{\@dblfpsep}{8pt}%
+\setlength{\@dblfpbot}{0pt plus 1fil}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\pagestyle{headings}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    Make \verb"|...|" shorthand for verbatim fragments. In the case of
+%    the \cls{amsldoc} class, we avoid requiring an extra package
+%    (\pkg{doc} or \pkg{shortvrb}), to reduce the possibility of package
+%    files not being found at run time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsldoc>
+\AtBeginDocument{\catcode`\|=\active }
+\def\activevert{\verb|}
+\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter
+  {\dospecials \do\|}%
+\expandafter\gdef\expandafter\@sanitize\expandafter
+  {\@sanitize \@makeother\|}
+\begingroup\catcode`\|=\active \gdef|{\protect\activevert{}}\endgroup
+%</amsldoc>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\arrayargpatch}
+%    If the column-specs arg of array or tabular contains a vert bar
+%    character, and we have made vert bars active, it will cause
+%    trouble. The following command, used in the ctab environment,
+%    prevents the trouble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\arrayargpatch}{%
+  \let\@oldarray\@array
+  \edef\@array[##1]##2{\catcode\number`\|=\number\catcode`\|
+    \catcode\number`\@=\number\catcode`\@ \relax
+    \let\noexpand\@array\noexpand\@oldarray
+    \noexpand\@array[##1]{##2}}%
+  \catcode`\|=12 \catcode`\@=12 \relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{environment}{ctab}
+%    An environment for centered tables.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newenvironment{ctab}{%
+  \par\topsep\medskipamount
+  \trivlist\centering
+  \item[]%
+  \arrayargpatch
+  \begin{tabular}%
+}{%
+  \end{tabular}%
+  \endtrivlist
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{environment}
+%
+%    Load \pkg{doc} package, reset \cn{AltMacroFont} to be the same as
+%    \cn{MacroFont} (when there are large sections of conditional
+%    code I think it looks better not to have it all slanted).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsdtx>
+\RequirePackage{doc}
+\def\AltMacroFont{\MacroFont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\SpecialMainEnvIndex}
+%    Override \fn{doc.sty}'s main environment indexing to get rid of
+%    the parens around ``environment'', for compatibility with our
+%    \cs{env} command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialMainEnvIndex#1{%
+    \@bsphack
+    \special@index{%
+        #1\actualchar\string\texttt{#1} environment\encapchar main%
+    }%
+    \special@index{%
+        environments:\levelchar#1%
+        \actualchar\string\texttt{#1}%
+        \encapchar main}%
+    \@esphack
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialEnvIndex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{%
+    \@bsphack
+    \index{#1\actualchar\string\texttt{#1} environment\encapchar usage}%
+    \index{%
+        environments:\levelchar#1%
+        \actualchar\string\texttt{#1}%
+        \encapchar usage}%
+    \@esphack
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\DescribeOption}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DescribeOption{%
+    \leavevmode
+    \@bsphack
+    \begingroup
+        \MakePrivateLetters
+    \Describe@Option
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\Describe@Option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\Describe@Option#1{%
+    \endgroup
+    \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1}}%
+    \SpecialOptionIndex{#1}%
+    \@esphack
+    \ignorespaces
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\PrintDescribeOption}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\PrintDescribeOption#1{\strut \MacroFont #1\ }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\option{%
+    \let\SpecialMainEnvIndex\SpecialMainOptionIndex
+\begingroup
+   \catcode`\\12
+   \MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@ \iffalse}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    \begin{macro}{\SpecialMainOptionIndex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialMainOptionIndex#1{%
+    \@bsphack
+    \special@index{#1\actualchar\string\texttt{#1} option\encapchar main}%
+    \@esphack
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SpecialOptionIndex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SpecialOptionIndex{\@category@index{option}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%    Ordinary \cn{DocInput} doesn't handle standardized file headers
+%    unless you enclose them in \cs{iffalse} \dots\ \cs{fi} which I
+%    don't care to do. So instead here's an alternate version of
+%    \cn{DocInput}, called \cn{hDocInput}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hDocInput#1{\MakePercentIgnore
+  \begingroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    Define active \qc{\@} which should be the first non-percent,
+%    non-equal-sign character when a file header is present. (If a file
+%    header is not present, \cn{hDocInput} should not be used.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \begingroup \lccode`\~=`\@
+  \lowercase{\endgroup\long\def ~}##1##{%
+    \catcode`\==12 \skipfileheader{##1}}%
+  \catcode`\@=\active \catcode`\==14 % comment
+  \def\filename{#1}%
+  \@@input#1 \MakePercentComment}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\skipfileheader#1#2 {\endgroup
+  \hGetFileInfo#2 version = "??" date = "??"\@nil
+  \begingroup\catcode`\==9 \catcode`\ =9 \futurelet\0\endgroup
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\hGetFileInfo#1 version = "#2"#3 date = "#4"#5\@nil{%
+  \def\fileversion{#2}\def\filedate{#4}}
+%</amsdtx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    A bunch of stuff we don't want in code indexes:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*amsdtx>
+\DoNotIndex{\@xp,\@nx,\@empty,\newcommand,\renewcommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\newenvironment,\renewenvironment,\providecommand}
+\DoNotIndex{\if,\fi,\ifnum,\fi,\@let@token,\futurelet,\fsa@n}
+\DoNotIndex{\ignorespaces,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\count@}
+\DoNotIndex{\toks@,\@ne,\advance}
+\DoNotIndex{\!,\/,\?,\@,\^,\_}
+\DoNotIndex{\@@par,\@M,\@auxout,\@bsphack,\@esphack,\@depth,\@ehc}
+\DoNotIndex{\@for,\@flushglue,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@height,\@idxitem}
+\DoNotIndex{\@ifnextchar,\@ifstar,\@ifundefined,\@input,\@latexerr}
+\DoNotIndex{\@makeschapterhead,\@namedef,\@nameuse,\@nil}
+\DoNotIndex{\@nobreakfalse,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue}
+\DoNotIndex{\@tempa,\@tempb,\@tempc,\@tempf,\@temptokena,\@themark,\@width}
+\DoNotIndex{\active,\aindex,\baselineskip,\begin,\begingroup,\box}
+\DoNotIndex{\c@page,\catcode,\chapter,\char,\chardef,\closeout}
+\DoNotIndex{\CodelineIndex,\sp,\sb,\label,\leavevmode,\mark}
+\DoNotIndex{\mark,\newinsert,\newwrite,\newtoks,\xdef}
+\DoNotIndex{\columnsep,\columnseprule,\columnwidth,\csname,\def}
+\DoNotIndex{\dimen,\do,\DocInput,\documentstyle,\edef,\em}
+\DoNotIndex{\EnableCrossrefs,\end,\endcsname,\endgroup,\endinput}
+\DoNotIndex{\everypar,\expandafter,\filedate,\fileversion}
+\DoNotIndex{\footnotesize,\gdef,\global,\glossary,\hangindent}
+\DoNotIndex{\if@filesw,\else,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\if@nobreak,\if@twocolumn,\if@twoside,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\hsize,\hskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifhmode,\ifmmode,\ifodd,\ifvmode,\ifx,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifcase,\ifdim,\ifeof,\iffalse,\iftrue,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\ifcat,\fi}
+\DoNotIndex{\immediate,\insert,\item,\jobname,\long}
+\DoNotIndex{\let,\lineskip,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\maxdimen}
+\DoNotIndex{\makeatletter,\noexpand,\openout,\protect,\rlap}
+\DoNotIndex{\min,\newpage,\nobreak,\normalbaselineskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\normallineskip,\p@,\par,\parfillskip,\parindent,\parskip}
+\DoNotIndex{\penalty,\relax,\section,\sin,\sloppy,\space,\string}
+\DoNotIndex{\tableofcontents,\the,\thepage,\thispagestyle,\toks,\tt}
+\DoNotIndex{\twocolumn,\uppercase,\vbox,\vrule,\vskip,\vss}
+\DoNotIndex{\write,\z@,\z@skip}
+%</amsdtx>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%    The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+%    the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/15}{Added {}{} after rightmark, leftmark to
+%   handle no-maketitle case}
+% \changes{v1.2b}{1995/02/15}{Added frenchspacing in error env heading}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2c}{1996/10/28}{Update version number, date for new release}
+%
+% \changes{v1.2d}{1997/03/13}{Fixed up loading method for OT1cmtt fd file}
+%
+% \changes{v2.03}{2004/04/06}{Reworked indexing commands for
+%    compatibility with doc.sty}
+%
+% \changes{v2.04}{2004/04/07}{Further work on indexing commands for
+% compatibility with macro and environment environments in \fn{doc.sty}.
+% Also added \env{option} environment, \cs{DescribeOption},
+% \cs{PrintDescribeOption}, \cs{SpecialOptionIndex}, and
+% \cs{SpecialMainOptionIndex}.}
+%
+% \changes{v2.05}{2004/04/27}{Fixed the amsdtx \cs{env} so that it
+% prints its argument in addition to putting it in the index.  Added
+% |\penalty\exhyphenpenalty| to \cs{mdash} and \cs{ndash} as per
+% \pkg{textcmds}.}
+%
+% \CheckSum{1516}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsmidx.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsmidx.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..3692d6cc76c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsmidx.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,241 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsmidx.dtx",
+%%%   version   = "2.01",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/03",
+%%%   time      = "14:45:42 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "63234 241 948 8307",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1995, 2004 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, amslatex, multiple indexes",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "This is part of the AMS-\LaTeX{} distribution.
+%%%                It contains code to support the creation and
+%%%                typesetting of multiple indexes with AMS-LaTeX{}
+%%%                document classes, superseding the single-index
+%%%                facilities built into those document classes.
+%%%                It also provides a facility to insert a paragraph
+%%%                of comments between the title and the index proper",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+% \iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{amsmidx} package}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\Barbara Beeton}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\hDocInput{amsmidx.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+%    This package provides the facility to produce multiple indexes
+%    with \amslatex/ document classes (particularly \fn{amsbook} and
+%    the AMS author packages for books), superseding the built-in
+%    index facility which can accommodate only one index.  This may
+%    in the future be incorporated as an option into the \amslatex/
+%    document classes.
+%
+%    This package is based on \pkg{multind.sty} by F.W. Long.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+%    Standard file identification.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{amsmidx}[2004/08/03 v2.01 multiple indexes for AMS classes]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{User instructions}
+%
+%    In the preamble, invoke \cn{makeindex} with a file name to provide
+%    as many indexes as desired:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    \makeindex{filename-a}
+%    \makeindex{filename-b}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    This will initiate the creation of \fn{filename-a.idx} etc.
+%
+%    In the body of the text, use the \cn{index} command with two
+%    arguments
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    \index{filename-a}{index term}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    as appropriate to populate the \fn{.idx} files.
+%
+%    In the \cn{backmatter} segment of the driver file, insert the
+%    \cn{Printendex} command to print the indexes; the second argument
+%    gives the title to be printed at the top of the index:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    \Printindex{filename-a}{First Index}
+%    \Printindex{filename-b}{Second Index}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%    On the first pass, the \fn{.idx} files will be created.  Process
+%    each \fn{.idx} file with \textit{MakeIndex} to generate an \fn{.ind}
+%    file, which will then be read in by \cn{Printindex}.  Whenever any
+%    page references change, be sure to run \textit{MakeIndex} again,
+%    and process the entire job with \latex/ once more to get the correct
+%    page references in the indexes.
+%
+%    To include a paragraph of comments below the index title, insert
+%    the text as an \cn{indexcomment} before the relevant \cn{Printindex}:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%    \indexcomment{Text of comments}
+%    \Printindex{...}{...}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    The \cn{indexcomment} text will be cleared after use.
+%
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{makeindex}
+%    Redefine \cn{makeindex} to create a new \fn{.idx} file with the
+%    name provided by argument |#1|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\makeindex}[1]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \makeatletter
+    \if@filesw \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
+    \expandafter\immediate\openout \csname #1@idxfile\endcsname #1.idx\relax
+    \typeout{Writing index file #1.idx }\fi
+  \endgroup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{index}
+%    Redefine \cn{index} to specify into which file/index the term is
+%    to be placed.  Argument |#1| identifies the file, |#2| provides
+%    the text of the term to be indexed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\index}[1]{%
+  \@bsphack
+  \begingroup
+    \def\protect##1{\string##1\space}\@sanitize\@wrindex{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{@wrindex}
+%    \cs{@wrindex} checks to make sure that the requested file is available,
+%    and writes an entry into the file or emits an error message.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\@wrindex}[2]{%
+  \let\thepage\relax
+  \xdef\@gtempa{%
+    \@ifundefined{#1@idxfile}{%
+      \PackageError{\@packagename}{%
+        The requested file, #1@idxfile.idx, does not exist;\MessageBreak
+        index term #2 will not be be written out.%
+      }%
+    }{%
+      \expandafter\write\csname #1@idxfile\endcsname
+        {\string\indexentry{#2}{\thepage}}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  \endgroup\@gtempa
+  \if@nobreak \ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
+  \@esphack
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{printindex}
+%  \begin{macro}{Printindex}
+%    Redefine \cs{printindex} to specify the file to be included; provide
+%    an alternate command \cs{Printindex} that specifies both the file and
+%    the index title to be printed.  Argument |#1| identifies the file,
+%    |#2| provides the title.  Also modify some formatting commands to
+%    improve the appearance of index entries, especially long ones in
+%    the presence of three index levels.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand{\printindex}[1]{\@input{#1.ind}}
+\newcommand{\Printindex}[2]{%
+  \begingroup
+    \cleardoublepage
+    \def\indexname{#2}%
+    \raggedright
+    \hyphenpenalty=10000
+    \renewcommand{\seename}{see~also}
+    \renewcommand{\subitem}{\par\hangindent 3em\hspace*{1em}}
+    \@input{#1.ind}%
+  \endgroup
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{indexcomment}
+%  \begin{macro}{indexchap}
+%    Format comments in a block somewhat narrower than the full page
+%    width, and redefine \cn{indexchap} to insert the block below the
+%    title, before starting the two-column index.  Clear out
+%    \cs{indexcomment} after use.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\@indexcommentwidth
+\@indexcommentwidth=\textwidth
+\ifdim\@indexcommentwidth > 26pc
+  \advance\@indexcommentwidth-6pc
+\else
+  \advance\@indexcommentwidth-4pc
+\fi
+\newcommand{\indexcomment}[1]{%
+  \def\theindexcomment{%
+    \vskip\baselineskip
+    \parbox[t]{\@indexcommentwidth}{\normalsize\mdseries#1}%
+    }%
+  }
+\let\theindexcomment\@empty
+\renewcommand{\indexchap}[1]{%
+  \global\topskip 7.5pc\relax
+  \twocolumn[\fontsize{\@xivpt}{18}%
+    \vskip\topskip\vskip-\baselineskip\hbox{}% adjust top space
+    \bfseries\centering #1\par
+    \ifx\theindexcomment\@empty
+    \else \theindexcomment
+      \global\let\theindexcomment\@empty
+    \fi
+    ]%
+  \global\topskip 34\p@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+%    the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{131}
+% \Finale
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsthdoc.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsthdoc.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..21e824f5ba0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/amsthdoc.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,374 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "amsthdoc.tex",
+%%%   version   = "2.20",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/03",
+%%%   time      = "15:02:46 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "15807 374 1763 14655",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1999, 2004 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, theorem, proof, amsthm",
+%%%   abstract  = "This file is the User's Guide for the amsthm
+%%%                package.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\documentclass[twoside]{article}
+\pagestyle{myheadings}
+
+% Use the same version numbers as for the amslatex instructions.
+\def\instrversion{2.20}
+\def\instrdate{August 2004}
+
+\title{Using the \pkg{amsthm} Package}
+\author{Version \instrversion, \instrdate\\American Mathematical Society}
+\date{}
+
+\providecommand{\qq}[1]{\textquotedblleft#1\textquotedblright}
+\providecommand{\mdash}{\textemdash\penalty\hyphenpenalty}
+
+% Embedded \index commands are a legacy from the time when this
+% documentation was part of amsldoc. Since they don't hurt anything,
+% let's leave them in. Maybe they will become useful again in the
+% future. [mjd,2000/06/06]
+
+\chardef\bslchar=`\\ % p. 424, TeXbook
+\newcommand{\ntt}{%
+  \fontfamily\ttdefault \fontseries\mddefault \fontshape\updefault
+  \selectfont
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cn}[1]{{\ntt\bslchar#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\cls}[1]{{\ntt#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\pkg}[1]{{\ntt#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\opt}[1]{{\ntt#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\env}[1]{{\ntt#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\fn}[1]{{\ntt#1}}
+
+\providecommand{\qedsymbol}{\leavevmode
+  \hbox to.77778em{%
+  \hfil\vrule
+  \vbox to.675em{\hrule width.6em\vfil\hrule}%
+  \vrule\hfil}}
+
+%%  Provide a meta-command facility; provide an alternate escape
+%%  character so it can be used within the verbatim environment.
+
+\catcode`\|=0
+\begingroup \catcode`\>=13 % in LaTeX2e verbatim env makes > active
+\gdef\?#1>{{\normalfont$\langle$\textup{#1}$\rangle$}}
+\gdef\0{\relax}
+\endgroup
+\def\<#1>{{\normalfont$\langle$\textup{#1}$\rangle$}}
+\def\ntnote#1{{\normalfont$^{#1}$}}
+
+\hfuzz4pt \vbadness9999 \hbadness5000
+\def\latex/{{\protect\LaTeX}}
+
+\setlength{\textwidth}{210mm}\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2in}
+\setlength{\oddsidemargin}{39pt}
+\setlength{\evensidemargin}{39pt}
+\addtolength{\textwidth}{-2\oddsidemargin}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+\markboth{USING THE \pkg{amsthm} PACKAGE}{USING THE \pkg{amsthm} PACKAGE}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+\begin{sloppypar}
+The \pkg{amsthm} package provides an enhanced version of \latex/'s
+\cn{newtheorem} command for defining theorem-like environments. The
+enhanced \cn{newtheorem} recognizes a
+\cn{theoremstyle} specification (as in Mittelbach's \pkg{theorem}
+package) and has a \verb'*' form for defining unnumbered environments. The
+\pkg{amsthm} package also defines a \env{proof} environment that
+automatically adds a QED symbol at the end. AMS document classes
+incorporate the \pkg{amsthm} package, so everything described here
+applies to them as well.
+\end{sloppypar}
+
+If the \pkg{amsthm} package is used with a non-AMS document class and
+with the \pkg{amsmath} package, \pkg{amsthm} must be loaded
+\emph{after} \pkg{amsmath}, not before.
+
+Examples are given in the file \fn{thmtest.tex}.  For best understanding,
+examine the output side-by-side with the input.
+
+
+\section{The \cn{newtheorem} command}
+
+In mathematical research articles and books, theorems\index{theorems}
+and proofs\index{proofs} are among the most common elements, but authors
+also use many others that fall in the same general class: lemmas,
+propositions, axioms, corollaries, conjectures, definitions, remarks,
+cases, steps, and so forth. It is natural to handle these elements as
+\latex/ environments, but document classes do not
+provide predefined environments for theorem-like elements because
+(a)~that would make it difficult for authors to exercise the necessary
+control over the automatic numbering, and (b)~the variety of such
+elements is so wide that it's not possible for a document class to
+provide every one that will ever be needed. Instead there is a command
+\cn{newtheorem}, similar in effect to \cn{newenvironment}, that makes it
+easy for authors to set up the elements required for a particular
+document.
+
+The \cn{newtheorem} command has two mandatory arguments; the first one
+is the environment name that the author would like to use for this
+element; the second one is the heading text. For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtheorem{lem}{Lemma}
+\end{verbatim}
+means that instances in the document of
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{lem} Text text ... \end{lem}
+\end{verbatim}
+will produce
+\[\makebox[.8\columnwidth]{%
+  \textbf{Lemma 1.} \textit{Text text \dots}\hfill}\]
+where the heading consists of the specified text \qq{Lemma} and an
+automatically generated number and punctuation.
+
+If \cn{newtheorem*} is used instead of \cn{newtheorem} in this
+example, numbers will not be generated automatically for
+any of the lemmas in the document. This form of the command can be
+useful if you have only one lemma and don't want it to be
+numbered; more often, though, it is used to produce a special named
+variant of one of the common theorem types. For example, if you have a
+lemma that should be labeled \qq{Klein's Lemma}, then the statement
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtheorem*{KL}{Klein's Lemma}
+\end{verbatim}
+would allow you to write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{KL} Text text ... \end{KL}
+\end{verbatim}
+and get the desired output.
+
+Sometimes additional information is desired in the heading of a
+theorem or lemma, often because it is cited from another source.
+An optional argument is used to provide this information:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{lem}[Alinhac-Lerner \cite{a-l}]
+\end{verbatim}
+yielding the output
+\[\makebox[.8\columnwidth]{%
+  \textbf{Lemma 2.} (Alinhac-Lerner [1]). \textit{Text text \dots}\hfill}\]
+
+
+\section{Numbering modifications}
+
+In addition to the two mandatory arguments, \cn{newtheorem} has two
+mutually exclusive optional arguments. These affect the
+sequencing\index{theorems!numbering} and hierarchy of the numbering.
+
+By default each kind of theorem-like environment is numbered
+independently. Thus if you have three lemmas and two theorems
+interspersed, they will be numbered something like this: Lemma 1, Lemma
+2, Theorem 1, Lemma 3, Theorem 2. If you want lemmas and theorems to
+share the same numbering sequence\mdash Lemma 1, Lemma 2, Theorem 3, Lemma
+4, Theorem 5\mdash then you should indicate the desired relationship as
+follows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}
+\end{verbatim}
+The optional argument \verb'[thm]' in the second statement means that
+the \texttt{lem} environment should share the \texttt{thm} numbering
+sequence instead of having its own independent sequence.
+
+To have a theorem environment numbered subordinately within a
+sectional unit\mdash e.g., to get propositions numbered Proposition 2.1,
+Proposition 2.2, and so on in Section~2\mdash put the name of the parent
+unit in square brackets in final position:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtheorem{prop}{Proposition}[section]
+\end{verbatim}
+With the optional argument \verb'[section]', the \verb'prop' counter
+will be reset to 0 whenever the parent counter \verb'section' is
+incremented, and the proposition label will have the section number
+prepended.
+
+Note that theorem numbering is not accomplished by the same method
+as the \cn{numberwithin} facility of \pkg{amsmath}, so an attempt to
+use that to relate theorem numbers to equation numbers will not work
+in the expected way.  A method for accomplishing that, as well as
+some other variations, is given in the AMS Author FAQ \cite{AF},
+in the section on \qq{Theorems in AMS-\LaTeX}.
+
+
+\section{Changing styles for theorem-like environments}
+
+\subsection{The \cn{theoremstyle} command}
+
+The \pkg{amsthm} package supports the notion of a current theorem style,
+which determines what will be produced by a given \cn{newtheorem}
+command. The three theorem styles provided\mdash
+\verb'plain',\index{plain theo@\texttt{plain} theorem style}\relax
+\index{definition theo@\texttt{definition} theorem style}\relax
+\index{remark theo@\texttt{remark} theorem style} \verb'definition',
+and \verb'remark'\mdash specify different degrees of
+visual emphasis corresponding to their relative importance. The
+details of this typographical treatment may vary depending on the
+document class, but typically the \verb'plain' style produces italic
+body text, while the other two styles produce roman body text.
+
+If no \cn{theoremstyle} command is given, the style used will be
+\texttt{plain}. To specify different styles,
+divide your \cn{new\-theorem} commands into groups and preface each
+group with the appropriate \cn{theo\-rem\-style}. Some examples:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\theoremstyle{plain}% default
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}[section]
+\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}
+\newtheorem{prop}[thm]{Proposition}
+\newtheorem*{cor}{Corollary}
+\newtheorem*{KL}{Klein's Lemma}
+
+\theoremstyle{definition}
+\newtheorem{defn}{Definition}[section]
+\newtheorem{conj}{Conjecture}[section]
+\newtheorem{exmp}{Example}[section]
+
+\theoremstyle{remark}
+\newtheorem*{rem}{Remark}
+\newtheorem*{note}{Note}
+\newtheorem{case}{Case}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The following list summarizes the types of structures which are
+normally associated with each theorem style.
+
+\smallskip
+\begin{tabular}{ll}
+ \relax\env{plain} & Theorem, Lemma, Corollary, Proposition, Conjecture, \\
+                   & Criterion, Algorithm \\
+ \relax\env{definition} \quad & Definition, Condition, Problem, Example \\
+ \relax\env{remark} & Remark, Note, Notation, Claim, Summary, \\
+                    & Acknowledgment, Case, Conclusion
+\end{tabular}
+
+\subsection{Number swapping}
+
+A common style variation is to have the theorem number at the beginning
+of the heading instead of at the end, for example \qq{1.4 Theorem}
+instead of \qq{Theorem 1.4}.  As this variation is usually applied
+to all \cn{theoremstyle}s, it is done by
+placing a \cn{swapnumbers} command at the beginning of the list of
+\cn{newtheorem} statements that should be affected. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\swapnumbers
+\theoremstyle{plain}
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}
+\theoremstyle{remark}
+\newtheorem{rem}{Remark}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In AMS document classes, when numbers are swapped, the style of the
+numbers matches that of section headings; this may not be the same
+style as the rest of the theorem heading.
+
+\subsection{New theorem styles}
+
+The \pkg{amsthm} package provides a \cn{newtheoremstyle} command
+to aid in the creation of custom styles, should the three predefined
+styles prove insufficient.  The following example illustrates the use
+of the \cn{newtheoremstyle} command.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newtheoremstyle{note}%  |?name>
+  {3pt}%      |?Space above>
+  {3pt}%      |?Space below>
+  {}%         |?Body font>
+  {}%         |?Indent amount>|ntnote1
+  {\itshape}% |?Theorem head font>
+  {:}%        |?Punctuation after theorem head>
+  {.5em}%     |?Space after theorem head>|ntnote2
+  {}%         |?Theorem head spec (can be left empty, meaning `normal')>
+\end{verbatim}
+\noindent
+\ntnote1 Indent amount: empty = no indent, \cn{parindent} = normal
+ paragraph indent
+
+\noindent
+\ntnote2 Space after theorem head: \verb+{ }+ = normal interword space;
+ \cn{newline} = linebreak
+
+\smallskip
+Apply the new theorem style in the same manner as the predefined ones.
+For examples, see the file \fn{thmtest.tex}.
+
+
+\section{Proofs}
+
+A predefined \env{proof} environment provided by the \pkg{amsthm}
+package produces the heading \qq{Proof} with appropriate spacing and
+punctuation. The proof environment is primarily intended for short
+proofs, no more than a page or two in length; longer proofs are
+usually better done as a separate \cn{section} or \cn{subsection} in
+your document.
+
+An optional argument of the proof environment allows you to substitute
+a different name for the standard \qq{Proof\/}. If you want
+the proof heading to be, say, \qq{Proof of the Main Theorem}, then write
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{proof}[Proof of the Main Theorem]
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A QED symbol, \qedsymbol, is automatically appended at the end of
+a \env{proof} environment. To substitute a different end-of-proof
+symbol, use \cn{renewcommand} to redefine the command \cn{qedsymbol}.
+For a long proof done as a subsection or section instead of with the
+\env{proof} environment, you can obtain the symbol and the usual
+amount of preceding space by using \cn{qed}.
+
+Placement of the QED symbol can be problematic if the last part of
+a \env{proof} environment is a displayed equation or list environment
+or something of that nature. In that case put a \cn{qedhere} command at
+the place where the QED symbol should appear, for example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{proof}
+...
+\begin{equation}
+G(t)=L\gamma!\,t^{-\gamma}+t^{-\delta}\eta(t) \qedhere
+\end{equation}
+\end{proof}
+\end{verbatim}
+When used with the \pkg{amsmath} package, version 2 or later, \cn{qedhere}
+will position the QED symbol flush right; with earlier versions, the
+symbol will be spaced a quad away from the end of the text or display.
+
+If \cn{qedhere} produces an error message in an equation, try using
+\verb'\mbox{\qedhere}' instead.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[AF]}
+
+\bibitem[AF]{AF} AMS Author FAQ,
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/authors/author-faq.html}
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/install.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..87fedfdc25c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/install.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+install.txt for amscls 2.20 [2004/08/05]
+
+If you have a relatively up-do-date TeX system that complies with the
+TeX Directory Structure (TDS) standard, installing according to the
+instructions in section I below is the easiest method.  See
+
+    http://www.tug.org/tds/tds.pdf
+
+for details on the TDS standard.  If your TeX system does not comply
+with the  TDS standard, please contact the manufacturer of your TeX
+system for details on how to install third-party TeX packages.
+
+The first step is to identify the TEXMF folder that contains files used
+by LaTeX. To do this, look for the file article.cls. If you find, e.g.,
+
+  /usr/local/share/texmf/tex/latex/base/article.cls
+
+then we will define TEXMF to mean /usr/local/share/texmf (everything
+up to the /tex/latex/base part). On a Windows system the file location
+will probably be something like
+
+  c:\sw\texmf\tex\latex\base\article.cls
+
+Then we define TEXMF to mean c:\sw\texmf. In the following
+instructions, wherever you see "TEXMF" substitute the folder name
+determined in this way.
+
+If this terminology does not make sense to you, seek assistance from
+a friend or colleague, or from the company that you bought your TeX
+system from, or contact us at
+
+  tech-support@ams.org
+  800-321-4AMS (321-4267) (USA/Canada)
+  401-455-4080
+
+========================================================================
+I. Installing the easy way.
+
+1. Download the following archive file:
+
+   ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amscls.zip
+
+2. View the following files to assess the effects of the upgrade on
+your system:
+
+  00readme.txt
+  install.txt (this file)
+  diffs-c.txt
+
+3. Backup the old version of AMS-LaTeX, preferably by moving it out of the
+TEXMF tree.
+
+4. Extract files fromthe .zip archive using your favorite unzip tool, setting
+the extraction target directory to the texmf root directory.
+
+5. To check the end result, you should find that you now have amsmath.sty
+in the following location
+
+  TEXMF/tex/latex/amscls/amsart.cls
+
+Some TeX systems also use a database to keep track of TeX input files. If
+this database is not updated, your TeX system might not find the newly
+installed files.  Consult your system's documentation to determine how
+to update this database.
+
+6. Some files will appear in both the source area and another area.
+This is because the source form and the in-use form are identical.
+As distributed, the files in the source/latex/amscls area comprise a
+complete copy of the distribution from which all the other files can
+be regenerated if need be. If you need to conserve disk space, you
+could delete the files in the source area, since they are not needed
+for normal use.
+
+========================================================================
+II. Installing the not-so-easy way.
+
+Download ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amscls.zip.
+
+Make the following directories, if not already present:
+
+  TEXMF/source/latex/amscls
+  TEXMF/tex/latex/amscls
+  TEXMF/doc/latex/amscls
+
+Backup your old AMS-LaTeX files if they are installed, preferably moving them
+out of the TEXMF tree.
+
+Create a temporary directory and generate documentation files (these assume
+a UNIX TeX installation):
+
+  - make directory /tmp/amscls
+  - unzip -d /tmp/amscls amscls.zip
+  - cd /tmp/amscls
+  - Run latex on the file ams-c1.ins to produce .cls and .sty files
+  - Run latex on *.tex
+  - [optional] Run latex on *.dtx (technical documentation)
+  - move *.dvi, *.pdf, *.tex to TEXMF/doc/latex/amscls
+  - [optional] move *.dtx to TEXMF/doc/latex/amscls
+  - [optional] convert .dvi to .ps or .pdf
+  - move *.sty and *.cls to TEXMF/tex/latex/amscls
+  - delete /tmp/amscls
+
+Some TeX systems also use a database to keep track of TeX input files. If
+this database is not updated, your TeX system might not find the newly
+installed files.  Consult your system's documentation to determine how to
+update this database.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/instr-l.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/instr-l.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..30aa283237b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/instr-l.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,1233 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "instr-l.tex",
+%%%   version   = "2.20",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/06",
+%%%   time      = "16:17:21 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "60855 1233 6587 50183",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1994, 2004 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, AMS, amslatex, ams-latex, author instructions",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   abstract  = "These are instructions for preparing documents for
+%%%                submission to the AMS, using amsmath and AMS LaTeX
+%%%                document classes.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16 checksum
+%%%                as the first value, followed by the equivalent of
+%%%                the standard UNIX wc (word count) utility output of
+%%%                lines, words, and characters.  This is produced by
+%%%                Robert Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}% LaTeX 2.09 can't be used (nor non-LaTeX)
+[1995/06/01]% LaTeX date must be June 1995 or later
+\documentclass{amsart}
+
+\hyphenation{man-u-script man-u-scripts over-view pre-par-ing which-ever}
+
+%%  Define macros for text substitution and for presentation of examples
+\newcommand{\AMS}{American Mathematical Society}
+\def\latex/{{\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\latexe/{{\protect\LaTeXe}}
+\def\amslatex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\LaTeX}}
+\def\tex/{{\protect\TeX}}
+\def\amstex/{{\protect\AmS-\protect\TeX}}
+\def\bibtex/{{Bib\protect\TeX}}
+\def\makeindx/{\textit{MakeIndex}}
+
+\newcommand{\filnam}[1]{\mbox{\texttt{\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}}
+\let\fn=\filnam
+\let\cls=\filnam
+\let\env=\filnam
+\let\pkg=\filnam
+\def\opt#1{\filnam{[#1]}}
+
+%%  For this manual, add a section number to the references header, and
+%%  include that section header in the contents list.
+\makeatletter
+\def\thebibliography#1{\section\refname
+  \normalfont\small\labelsep .5em\relax
+  \list{\@arabic\c@enumiv.}{\settowidth\labelwidth{#1.}%
+  \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+  \usecounter{enumiv}}%
+  \sloppy \clubpenalty4000\relax \widowpenalty\clubpenalty
+  \sfcode`\.\@m}
+%
+%%  Turn off series logo and copyright note
+\let\serieslogo@\relax
+\let\@setcopyright\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%%  Table of contents customizations
+
+\let\tocori=\tableofcontents
+\def\tableofcontents{\tocori
+  \skip@\lastskip \vskip-\lastskip
+  \addtocontents{toc}{\protect\tocpatch}%
+  \vskip\skip@ \relax}
+
+\def\tocsection#1#2#3{%
+  \indentlabel{\@ifnotempty{#2}{\tocnbox{\hss#1 #2.\quad}}}#3}
+\let\tocnbox=\hbox
+\def\tocpatch{%
+  \@xp\let\csname r@tocindent2\@xp\endcsname\csname r@tocindent1\endcsname
+  \def\tocnbox{\hbox to\@tempdima}}
+%%  In this document, subsections are unnumbered, but we want an indent
+%%  to be used.
+\def\tocsubsection#1#2#3{\hbox to\leftskip{}#3}
+\def\l@subsection{\@tocline{2}{0pt}{.5pc}{}{}}
+\makeatother
+
+\newdimen\exindent
+\exindent=3\parindent
+%% Add a high penalty to discourage line breaks within an example
+%% without absolutely prohibiting them.
+{\obeylines
+ \gdef^^M{\par\penalty9999 }%
+ \gdef\beginexample#1{\medskip\bgroup %
+   \def\(##1){\makebox[0pt]{\normalfont\mdseries##1}}%
+   \def~{\char`\~}\def\\{\char`\\}%
+   \normalfont\ttfamily\frenchspacing %
+   \parindent=0pt#1\leftskip=\exindent\obeylines}
+}%  end \obeylines
+\def\endexample{\endgraf\egroup\medskip}
+\newdimen\exboxwidth
+\exboxwidth=3in
+\def\exbox#1#2{\noindent \hangindent=\exboxwidth
+  \makebox[0pt][r]{\null\normalfont\mdseries#1\unskip\enspace}%
+  \makebox[\exboxwidth][l]{\normalfont\ttfamily\ignorespaces#2}%
+  \normalfont\mdseries\ignorespaces}
+
+\newcommand\cn[1]{\mbox{\def\\{\char`\\}%
+    \normalfont\ttfamily\\\ignorespaces#1\unskip}}
+\let\ttcs=\cn
+\newcommand\ttcsb[2]{%
+  \mbox{\def\\{\char`\\}%
+    \normalfont\ttfamily
+    \\begin\{\ignorespaces#1\unskip\}\ignorespaces#2\unskip}}
+\newcommand\ttcse[1]{\mbox{\def\\{\char`\\}%
+    \normalfont\ttfamily\\end\{\ignorespaces#1\unskip\}}}
+\def\{{\char`\{\relax}
+\def\}{\char`\}\relax}
+
+%%  Provide a meta-command facility; provide an alternate escape
+%%  character so it can be used within the verbatim environment.
+
+\catcode`\|=0
+\begingroup \catcode`\>=13 % in LaTeX2e verbatim env makes > active
+\gdef\?#1>{{\normalfont$\langle$\textup{#1}$\rangle$}}
+\gdef\0{\relax}
+\endgroup
+\def\<#1>{{\normalfont$\langle$\textup{#1}$\rangle$}}
+\newcommand{\Dimen}{\<dimen>}
+\newcommand{\tab}{\textsc{tab}}
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+%%  Provide a dummy titlepage, saving maketitle for the article title.
+%%  Table of contents goes onto the inside front cover.
+
+\def\instrversion{2.20}
+\def\instrdate{August 2004}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\vspace*{1.5in}
+\begin{center}
+  {\huge\bfseries Instructions\\[2pt] for Preparation\\[2pt]
+    of Papers\\[2pt] and Monographs
+    \par\vspace{\baselineskip}
+    \amslatex/
+    \par}
+  \vspace{3\baselineskip}
+  \Large
+  Version \instrversion\\[4pt] \instrdate
+\end{center}
+\newpage
+
+\thispagestyle{empty}
+\tableofcontents
+\newpage
+
+\setcounter{page}{1}
+
+\title [ELECTRONIC MANUSCRIPTS: \amslatex/]
+   {Instructions for Preparation\\
+   of Papers and Monographs: \amslatex/}
+\dedicatory{%
+  \mbox{\normalfont\mdseries\small Version \instrversion: \instrdate}}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+This manual is directed mainly to authors preparing material for
+publication by the AMS, using \amslatex/ document classes.  As such,
+it deals with the AMS publishing style.  Since these document classes
+are also used by authors who are not submitting items to the AMS,
+the manual also covers topics of more general relevance.  However, it
+assumes familiarity with standard \latex/ techniques and conventions,
+and contains only material specific to AMS packages.
+
+Links to information useful in preparing manuscripts and graphics
+can be found on the AMS Author Resource Center web page \cite{ARC}\@.
+That information supplements this manual, and we recommend that you
+review it.
+
+The AMS produces three major types of publications: journals (both
+print and electronic), proceedings volumes, and monographs.  There
+is a core AMS document class for each: \cls{amsart}, \cls{amsproc}
+and \cls{amsbook}, respectively.  For most journals or book series,
+there is a specific author package, based on one of the core classes.
+If the specific publication is known, the appropriate author package
+should be obtained from the AMS web server \cite{AP} and used for
+preparation of manuscripts.  In addition, there is a separate package
+for editors of proceedings volumes \cite{EP}, with facilities for
+preparing material that does not fit into the normal ``article''
+category.
+
+If the specific publication is not known, an appropriate generic AMS
+document class can be used:
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{gen-j-l} for journal articles (based on \pkg{amsart})
+\item \pkg{gen-p-l} for articles in book proceedings (based on \pkg{amsproc})
+\item \pkg{gen-m-l} for monographs (based on \pkg{amsbook})
+\end{itemize}
+
+The tagging of elements in a manuscript---title, author(s), section
+headings, theorems, etc.--- is consistent through all author packages.
+Thus a manuscript prepared using the appropriate generic document
+class can be modified trivially to use the specific package, simply by
+updating the \cn{documentclass} statement.  For example, to specify
+the \textit{Contemporary Mathematics} proceedings series:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{conm-p-l}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Each author package contains an electronic version of this manual,
+class files, sample documents, and a \texttt{README} file that
+contains information about each of the files in the package.
+
+When an AMS author package is used, both \latex/ and a recent version
+of \amslatex/ must be installed on the computer being used for
+manuscript preparation.  The AMS Author Resource Center web page
+\cite{ARC} has a link to download the most recent version of
+\amslatex/.  The version number appears at the top of the file
+\pkg{amsmath.sty} (and other files in the collection), and is also
+reported in the log file of a \latex/ run; make sure you have
+version 2.0 or later.
+
+\section{Article preparation}
+
+We first address articles intended for journals and proceedings.
+Monographs are addressed in a separate section (see
+page~\pageref{s:mono}).
+
+\subsection*{Starting a new article}\label{ss:newamsart}
+%%
+Individual articles generally have the following structure:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb+\documentclass{...}+
+\item preamble (for document-specific customizations)
+\item \verb+\begin{document}+
+\item top matter information
+\item \verb+\maketitle+ (to set the top matter)
+\item article body
+\item reference list
+\item \verb+\end{document}+
+\end{itemize}
+A detailed template file (included in each package) provides
+a complete set of commands for the article top matter, and the
+instructions for using them.  The most efficient way to start a
+new article is to make a copy of the template and fill it in.
+
+
+\section{The preamble}
+
+The area between the \verb+\documentclass+ statement and the line
+\verb+\begin{document}+ is referred to as the ``preamble''.  This is
+the place to load external packages and define document-specific
+commands.
+
+Available \cn{documentclass} options are described in the file
+\filnam{amsclass.dtx}.  Process this file with \latex/ to obtain a
+version with human-readable documentation.  One option does need to
+be mentioned here: \opt{psamsfonts}; include this option as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[psamsfonts]{...}
+\end{verbatim}
+to ensure correct sizing of fonts in environments other than normal text.
+
+\subsection*{Packages}
+%%
+The AMS document classes incorporate the code for the AMS theorem
+(\pkg{amsthm}) package and automatically load the \pkg{amsmath}
+package.  It is not necessary to request either one explicitly.
+The user guides for these packages \cite{ATP,AMP} contain the details,
+which will not be repeated here.  The \pkg{amsfonts} package is loaded
+as well, unless the \opt{noamsfonts} option is specified; see the
+AMSFonts User's Guide \cite{AFG} for the features provided.
+
+Not all publicly available packages are compatible with the AMS
+document classes.  For this reason, we mention some that are:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{amssymb} provides names for additional symbols from the
+  AMS symbol fonts; see \cite{AFG} for details.
+\item \pkg{amsmidx} supports multiple indexes for a book; see
+  page~\pageref{ss:indexing}.
+\item \pkg{graphicx} is part of the \latex/ suite, preferred for
+  inclusion of graphics.
+\item \pkg{longtable} facilitates tables longer than one page.
+\item \pkg{upref} forces cross-references with \cn{ref} to roman;
+  see ``Roman type'', page~\pageref{ss:roman}.
+\item \pkg{xypic} is recommended for creating commutative diagrams.
+\end{itemize}
+
+There are several packages that cause particular problems for AMS
+production.  Their use should be avoided if possible:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \pkg{psfrag}, for applying labels externally to included graphics,
+  may result in a PostScript that can't be converted properly to PDF.
+\item \pkg{epsfig} has been superseded by \pkg{graphicx}.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Don't load any packages that aren't actually needed.
+
+
+\subsection*{New commands}
+%%
+Place all definitions for new commands in the preamble.  This includes
+instructions to access fonts that are not already defined in the AMS
+document classes or \pkg{amsmath}, such as a new math alphabet (see
+\cite{AMP}).
+
+Always use \cn{newcommand}; this will let you know if the name you
+have chosen has already been used.  Do not redefine any command from
+\latex/, \pkg{amsmath}, or any AMS document class, as this could cause
+problems in AMS production.  New definitions may be used to provide
+shorthand forms for mathematical expressions that are used frequently,
+but do not use new definitions for text; for articles posted on-line,
+this will prevent indexing software from identifying relevant
+references.
+
+Use commands and environments provided by the AMS document classes
+and standard packages whenever applicable---for example, you should
+use the AMS \env{proof} environment rather than define your own
+alternative.
+
+When the file is complete, remove any commands that haven't been used.
+
+
+\section{Top matter}\label{s:topmatter}
+
+The top matter associated with an article includes information that
+would appear in a bibliographic reference to the paper, plus additional
+information about the author(s), subject classifications, key words,
+acknowledgments of support, and the abstract.
+
+
+\subsection*{Summary of tags and elements}
+%%
+Table 1 lists the top matter commands provided by \amslatex/
+version 2.0 and later.  Not every tag is necessary for each paper.
+The table shows which tags are necessary and which are optional.
+Requirements for monographs are somewhat different and are described
+later.  The template file included in every author package contains
+all the necessary tags and instructions for using them.
+
+\begin{table}[ht]
+\caption{Top matter tags}
+\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{amsart}
+|?preamble commands, such as |ttcs|bgroup|0newcommand|egroup, etc.>
+
+\begin{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+\begin{center}
+\begin{tabular}{lcc}
+\                 & \multicolumn{2}{c}{Required by}\\
+\                               & Journals  & Books \\
+\verb+\title[...]{...}+         & yes\rlap{${}^1$} & yes\rlap{${}^1$} \\
+
+\verb+\author[...]{...}+        & yes\rlap{${}^1$} & yes\rlap{${}^1$} \\
+\verb+\contrib[...]{...}+       & no\rlap{${}^2$} & --- \\
+\verb+\address{...}+            & yes & yes \\
+\verb+\curraddr{...}+           & no  & no \\
+\verb+\email{...}+              & no  & no \\
+\verb+\urladdr{...}+		& no  & no \\
+\verb+\dedicatory{...}+         & no  & no \\
+\verb+\date{...}+               & ---\rlap{${}^3$} & --- \\
+\verb+\thanks{...}+             & no & no \\
+\verb+\translator{...}+         & ---\rlap{${}^3$} & ---\rlap{${}^3$} \\
+\verb+\keywords{...}+           & no & no \\
+\verb+\subjclass[2000]{...}+    & yes & yes \\
+\verb+\begin{abstract}...\end{abstract}+ & yes\rlap{${}^4$} & no \\
+\verb+\maketitle+               & yes & yes \\
+\end{tabular}
+\end{center}
+\vspace*{1pc}
+
+{\Small
+${}^1$ If no short form is needed, omit the brackets.
+
+${}^2$ For contributors, see details on page~\pageref{ss:contrib}.
+
+${}^3$ If this is necessary, it  will be filled in by the AMS staff.
+
+${}^4$ For the \textit{Journal of the  American Mathematical Society},
+abstracts are optional.
+\par
+}
+\end{minipage}
+\vspace{.25\baselineskip}
+\hrule width \textwidth
+\vspace{.5\baselineskip}
+\end{table}
+
+\subsection*{Title}
+%%
+For AMS journal articles, capitalize only the first word and proper
+nouns in the title.  For articles in an AMS proceedings volume,
+capitalize the first and last words of the title and all nouns,
+pronouns, adjectives, adverbs, and verbs.  Articles, conjunctions, and
+prepositions should be lowercased unless they are the first or last
+word of the title.  These rules should be followed even if the
+publication in which the article appears has another style.  The style
+for the particular publication will be generated automatically when
+the article is processed at the AMS.
+
+A multiline title may be left for \latex/ to break, or a desired break
+may be indicated by \cn{\\}.
+
+Unless the title is very short, provide a form of the title suitable
+for use in running heads.  This should be entered in brackets between the
+tag \cn{title} and the full title:
+\verb+\title[+short title\verb+]{+full title\verb+}+.
+Do not use author-defined macros in the title.
+
+\subsection*{Author information}\label{ss:authorinfo}
+%%
+Enter the name(s) of the author(s) with the tag \cn{author}, using
+standard capitalization for proper names.  Use a separate \cn{author}
+command for each author.  Names will be combined by \latex/ according
+to the dictates of the document class.  See also ``contributors'',
+below.
+
+If the author name(s) cannot fit in the space available for the running
+head, enter a shortened form for each name in [brackets]
+between the tag \cn{author} and the full name.  Acceptable shortened
+forms use initials for all but the surname(s).  For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\author[J. Smith]{Joseph Smith}
+\end{verbatim}
+If the list of shortened author names is still too long for the running
+head (including a reasonable space for the page number), it can be
+shortened as in the following example, as a last resort:
+\begin{trivlist}
+\item\relax
+\verb+\markleft{J. SMITH ET AL.}+
+\end{trivlist}
+
+\noindent
+Note that \cn{markleft} is available only for \amslatex/ versions 2.20
+and later; it is not a basic \latex/ command.
+Data provided with \cn{markleft\{\}} \emph{must} be in all capital letters
+(except for included math). Place \cn{markleft\{\}} before the first
+\cn{author} in your file.
+
+For each author you should provide one or more addresses.  Tag them
+as follows, grouping them in this order by author:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\address{...}   |rm address where the research was carried out |tt
+\curraddr{...}  |rm current address, if different from the research address |tt
+\email{...}     |rm address for electronic mail |tt
+\urladdr{...}   |rm URL address (optional)
+\end{verbatim}
+Do \emph{not} include any addresses within the scope of an
+\cn{author\{\}} command (this is different from basic \latex/).
+Do not use abbreviations in addresses.
+
+The main address should be divided by \cn{\\} into segments that
+correspond to address lines for use on an envelope.  When typeset, the
+lines will be strung together separated by commas, but the division by
+\cn{\\} will be useful to a person preparing an envelope to return
+proofs.
+
+Addresses are considered part of the top matter, but in AMS articles
+they are ordinarily printed at the end of the article following the
+bibliography (this is different from basic \latex/).  Suitable labels
+will indicate the current, e-mail, and URL addresses, typically
+\textit{Current address}:, \textit{E-mail address}:, \textit{URL}:,
+respectively.
+
+If \texttt{\textasciitilde} is needed in a URL address, enter it
+directly as \texttt{\textasciitilde} if you are using \amslatex/
+version 2.20 or later; otherwise, see the Author FAQ \cite{AF}
+for instructions.
+
+\subsection*{Contributors
+  {\mdseries (new with version 2.20)}}\label{ss:contrib}
+%%
+Contributors are much like authors, but are responsible for only
+a portion of an article, e.g., an appendix or auxiliary tables.
+The bracketed portion is not optional; it gives the exact text that
+will be printed to indicate the nature of the contribution:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\contrib[with an appendix by]{William Rogers}
+\end{verbatim}
+Multiple contributors and contributions are input like this:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\contrib[with Appendix A by]{William Rogers}
+\contrib[]{Henry Taylor}
+\contrib[and Appendix B by]{John Henderson}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the empty brackets on the second line.  Multiple contributors
+indicated in this way will be combined and ``andified'' appropriately.
+Contributors will not be included in running heads.  Addresses provided
+for contributors will be treated the same as for regular authors.
+
+\subsection*{Dedication}
+%%
+Use the tag \cn{dedicatory} for such things as ``Dedicated to
+Professor X on the occasion of his eightieth birthday.''  If the
+dedication is longer than one line, you may indicate a break with
+\cn{\\}.
+
+\subsection*{Acknowledgments of support and other first-page footnotes}
+%%
+Use the command \cn{thanks} to acknowledge grants and other kinds of
+support or for other general information not covered by one of the
+more specific commands such as \cn{keywords} or \cn{subjclass}.  Enter
+\cn{thanks} immediately following the address(es) for the relevant
+author, \emph{not} within the scope of the \cn{author\{\}} command
+(this is different from basic \latex/).  Like \cn{address}, \cn{thanks}
+can appear more than once in the top matter.  Each occurrence will be
+printed as an unnumbered footnote at the bottom of the first page of
+the article.
+
+\subsection*{Subject information}
+%%
+Subject classifications and key words, like acknowledg-\linebreak ments, are
+part of the top matter and appear as unnumbered footnotes at the bottom of
+the first page.
+
+Subject classifications may be primary (the major topic(s) of the
+paper) or secondary (subject areas covered by ancillary results,
+motivation or origin of problems discussed, intended or potential
+field of application, or other significant aspects worthy of notice).
+At least one primary subject classification is \textbf{required}.
+Additional primaries and secondaries are optional.
+
+\begin{samepage}
+These classifications are entered as
+\begin{verbatim}
+\subjclass[2000]{Primary |?primary class>; Secondary |?secondary classes>}
+\end{verbatim}
+(Omitting \texttt{[2000]} will cause the 1991 Subject Classification
+to be cited.)
+\end{samepage}
+
+To determine the classifications, use the 2000 Mathematics Subject
+Classification scheme that appears in annual indexes of \textit{Mathematical
+Reviews} beginning in 1999.  It can also be accessed on the Web at URL:
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/msc/} or obtained in printed form from
+Customer Services.
+Please use the full number; the two-digit code from the Contents of
+\textit{Mathematical Reviews} is \textbf{not} sufficient.
+
+Key words are not required but may be provided by an author if desired.
+They should be tagged as \cn{keywords\{...\}}.
+
+\subsection*{Abstract}
+%%
+With an AMS document class, place the abstract before \cn{maketitle},
+contrary to the practice with the basic \latex/ document classes.
+This is necessary to ensure that the abstract can always be printed in
+the proper location and style.  If the abstract is given after
+\cn{maketitle}, it will be printed in place and generate a warning
+message.
+
+Input the abstract text between \verb+\begin{abstract}...\end{abstract}+.
+It may comprise multiple paragraphs and include displayed material if
+appropriate.  The length of the abstract depends primarily on the
+length of the paper itself and on the difficulty of summarizing the
+material.  An upper limit of about 150 words for short papers and 300
+words for long papers is suggested.  Do not use author-defined macros
+or \cn{ref} in the abstract.
+
+
+\section{Document body (all document classes)}
+
+\subsection*{Linking for the Web}
+%%
+All AMS primary journals are posted on-line.  Electronic
+manuscripts prepared in \latex/ for any AMS journal should be tagged
+for maximum linking on the Web. For use of \cn{label}, \cn{ref},
+and \cn{cite}, see \cite{LC}; for \cn{eqref}, see \cite{AMP}.
+
+\subsection*{Headings}
+%%
+Four levels of headings are provided to permit logical sectioning of
+a manuscript.  These headings are applicable to individual articles
+and to chapters of a monograph.  (Headings specific to monographs are
+listed under \textit{Monograph formatting}.)
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\specialsection{...}
+\section[...]{...}
+\subsection[...]{...}
+\subsubsection[...]{...}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\cn{specialsection} is for long articles that need extra divisions
+(e.g., parts) at a level above the \cn{section} level.
+
+Explicit line breaks are obtained by \verb+\\+ in first-level section
+headings.
+
+Any heading may be given a label to allow references to be made to it,
+by including a \cn{label\{...\}} command with a unique identifier
+directly \emph{after} the heading.  References are made using the
+command \cn{ref\{...\}} and the same identifier.  For example,
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section{Monograph formatting}
+\label{s:mono}
+\end{verbatim}
+will establish a label for this section that can be referred to with
+\cn{ref\{s:mono\}}. Cross references of
+this sort will require \latex/ to be run at least twice for proper
+resolution.  A warning at the end of the \latex/ run, ``Cross
+references may have changed\dots\unskip'', should be heeded in this regard.
+
+
+\subsection*{Mathematical text}
+%%
+For instructions on preparing mathematical text, refer to
+\cite{AMP} and \cite{ML}.  See also ``Roman type'', below.
+
+\subsection*{Lists}
+%%
+Follow usual \latex/ conventions for producing list environments.
+
+\subsection*{Theorems, lemmas, and other proclamations}
+%%
+See the manual \textit{Using the \pkg{amsthm} package} \cite{ATP}
+for details. Theorem environments following AMS style with respect to
+punctuation, spacing and paragraphing are defined in the AMS document
+classes.  This is incompatible with the \latex/ \pkg{theorem} package,
+which cannot be used with the AMS document classes.
+
+Three different theorem styles are provided by AMS document classes:
+\cls{plain}, \cls{definition}, and \cls{remark}. By referring to these
+styles and using the \cn{newtheorem} command, you can build a
+complement of theorem environments appropriate for any paper or
+monograph.  All \cn{newtheorem} specifications should be included in
+the preamble; a starter set is included in the template for every
+AMS author package.
+
+Theorem support is also available separately in the \pkg{amsthm} package
+for users of document classes other than those from the AMS.
+
+\subsection*{Equations}
+%%
+Check displayed equations carefully, making sure they are broken and
+aligned following the guidelines in \cite[pp. 44--48]{MIT}.
+
+\subsection*{Roman type}\label{ss:roman}
+%%
+Numbers, punctuation, (parentheses), [brackets],
+$\lbrace$braces$\rbrace$, and symbols used as labels should always be
+set in roman type.  This is true even within the statement of a theorem,
+which is ordinarily set in italic type.
+
+Be careful to distinguish between roman elements that are mathematical
+in nature (e.g., ``a group of class 2''), and those that are part of
+the text (e.g., a label or a year).  Mathematical expressions, no matter
+how short or insignificant, should be coded as math, by enclosing them
+within dollar signs \verb+$...$+ or \verb+\(...\)+.  Roman text elements
+should be coded as \cn{textup\{...\}} in potentially nonroman
+environments such as theorems.
+
+Abbreviated forms of mathematical terms are also usually set in roman
+type to distinguish them from mathematical variables or constants.
+Use the control sequences for common mathematical functions and
+operators like \verb+log+ and \verb+lim+; use \cn{DeclareMathOperator}
+to add additional operator names (see \cite[\S5]{AMP}).
+
+The style of reference citations, though publication-dependent, is
+usually roman.  To ensure consistency and support linking for the Web,
+\textbf{always} use the standard \latex/ \cn{cite} command when citing
+a reference.  Internal references with the \cn{ref} command are not
+automatically roman in non-roman environments, but can be forced by
+using the \pkg{upref} package (part of the \amslatex/ collection).
+
+\subsection*{Exercises}
+%%
+Exercises are produced using the \env{xca} and \env{xcb} environments.
+\env{xca} may be used in any publication, but must be defined in
+the document preamble with \cn{theoremstyle\{definition\}} and the
+\cn{newtheorem} command; it is used for exercises that occur within a
+section.  \env{xcb} is defined only for monographs and is used for
+exercises that occur at the end of a chapter.
+
+\subsection*{Indexing facilities}
+\label{ss:indexing}
+%%
+The tags needed for \makeindx/ are already included in AMS document
+classes.  Do not include the \pkg{makeidx} package, but do put the
+command \cn{makeindex} in the preamble to launch a single index.
+See \cite[chapter 11]{LC} and \cite[chapter 11]{GL} for use of
+\makeindx/.
+
+A package for multiple indexes, \pkg{amsmidx}, is included in the
+\amslatex/ collection beginning with version 2.20.  Unlike other
+multiple-index packages, \pkg{amsmidx} is compatible with the AMS
+document classes.  To use this package, put these commands into the
+preamble:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage{amsmidx}
+\makeindex{|?name of first index file>}
+\makeindex{|?name of second index file>}
+\end{verbatim}
+To identify index entries in the text:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\index{|?name of index file>}{|?index term>}
+\end{verbatim}
+In the backmatter, where the indexes are to appear:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\Printindex{|?name of first index file>}{|?title of first index>}
+\Printindex{|?name of second index file>}{|?title of second index>}
+\end{verbatim}
+Note the capitalization of the \cn{Printindex} command.
+
+\section{Floating objects: Figures and tables}
+
+Figures and tables are usually handled as floating inserts.  Such
+items are often so large that fitting them into the document at the
+point of reference may cause problems with pagination.  Placing such
+items into a floating insert allows them to be repositioned
+automatically by \latex/ as required for good pagination.
+
+A floating insert generally contains one of these possibilities:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \latex/ code that produces an object such as a table or
+  commutative diagram;
+\item a command to incorporate an item produced by another application
+  (most often an Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file produced by a
+  graphics utility; see \textit{Electronic graphics},
+  page~\pageref{ss:electronicgraphics}).
+\end{itemize}
+
+If a figure is described by \latex/ code (e.g., using \pkg{xypic} or
+the \env{picture} environment), it should be included directly in the
+file.
+
+\subsection*{Placement}
+%%
+Floats should
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item be numbered consistently throughout the paper (figures and tables
+  are numbered separately),
+\item be placed at the top or bottom of the page,
+\item have an in-text reference, and
+\item definitely appear within the same section as their first text
+  reference.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+A figure or table should not precede its first text reference unless
+they both appear on the same page spread.  When a figure or table is
+an integral part of text, it may appear unnumbered in place in the
+middle of text.
+
+Figures and tables should be allowed to float according to the \latex/
+defaults preset by the document class.  If you are submitting a file
+that will be processed at the AMS (this applies to all journal
+articles), you could introduce major problems with pagination if you
+hard-set your figures and tables by using the \verb+[h!]+ option.
+Production problems will be avoided when you use the appropriate
+author package class file and avoid using figure or table options.
+For electronic manuscripts, the final placement of inserts will be
+determined by the AMS editorial staff, on the basis of the most
+appropriate page layout.
+
+\subsection*{Captions}
+%%
+Captions for floating inserts are usually positioned above a table and
+below a figure. The following is the general structure used to specify
+a figure insert, with a caption at the bottom:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{figure}
+\includegraphics{|?file name of |tt.eps|rm| file>}|quad|rm or|tt|quad|?code for the insertion>
+\caption{|?caption text>}
+\label{|?reference label>}|quad|rm (optional)|tt
+\end{figure}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+This is the general structure for a table insert, with a caption at
+the top:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{table}
+\caption{|?caption text>}
+\label{|?reference label>}|quad|rm (optional)|tt
+|?code for the insertion body>
+\end{table}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Caption headings (e.g., ``\textsc{Table 3.1.}''\ or
+``\textsc{Figure 7.}'')\ will be supplied automatically.  The
+\<caption text> is any appropriate descriptive text, and may be
+omitted if no descriptive text is desired.  (The style of the caption
+differs from the basic \latex/ caption style.)  A reference label
+should usually be associated with the caption, and must be given
+\emph{after} the caption.  A reference in text to the figure or table
+has the form \cn{ref\{\<reference label>\}}.
+
+\latex/ packages for captions may appear to work with the AMS document
+classes, but the caption style doesn't usually match the AMS style.
+
+\subsection*{Electronic graphics}\label{ss:electronicgraphics}
+%%
+Graphics created by applications other than \latex/ may be submitted
+to the AMS in an electronic format.  This includes output from
+graphics applications as well as scanned photographs or other
+computer-generated images.  The AMS requires such graphics in
+Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format.
+
+Use the \pkg{graphicx} package (part of the \pkg{graphics} bundle
+of \latex/) to embed references to EPS graphics directly in a \latex/
+file; see the manual, \filnam{grfguide.tex} \cite{GB}.  Another
+valuable reference is the manual ``Using EPS Graphics in \latexe/
+Documents'' \cite{EG}.
+
+Other packages are not recommended, as there are numerous areas of
+incompatibility which may result in the need for manual intervention,
+delaying processing and increasing the cost.
+
+The EPS files will not be physically included in the \latex/ file.
+You must submit a separate file for each graphic along with the \latex/
+document.  No matter what method is used to produce a graphic, it is
+necessary to provide a paper copy to the AMS for verification.  Double
+check to make sure the electronic and paper versions are the same.
+
+\subsection*{Compatibility requirements for graphics}
+There are two important requirements that must be observed when
+embedding graphics.
+
+\emph{Omit path names} for the included files.  Instead of
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics*{/usr/joe/book/figures/fig1.ps}
+\end{verbatim}
+use just the name of the file:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\includegraphics*{fig1.ps}
+\end{verbatim}
+The easiest way to do this is to place the graphics files in the
+same directory as the file(s) being {\TeX}ed.
+
+Do not use the \cn{graphicspath\{\<directory list>\}} command to
+establish a path.  This will result in the path being included in
+the DVI file, which will be impossible to process at the AMS\@.
+It may be possible to specify a path using one of the environments
+recognized by the {\TeX} engine (\fn{TEXINPUTS}, for example);
+instructions for setting these environments should be in the
+documentation for your system.
+
+Graphics commands must be compatible with the \textit{dvips} output
+driver.  This is particularly important if you are submitting a DVI
+file for a camera-ready publication.  The method is specific to the
+graphics package you are using; a typical method is to use a file
+\filnam{graphics.cfg} containing the line \cn{ExecuteOptions\{dvips\}}
+when you run \latex/ to create the DVI or PostScript file to send to
+the AMS.
+
+\subsection*{Technical requirements for graphics}
+%%
+If you scale a figure before submitting it, remember that line weights
+also scale.  The lightest line weight that will reproduce clearly at
+high resolution is 0.5pt after scaling.  Do \emph{not} specify
+``hairline'' weight, as this will be nearly invisible at high
+resolution and will disappear in the printing process. If a rule line
+is screened, its weight should be no less than 1 point \emph{after}
+scaling.
+
+Graded line weights should increase in increments of at least 0.5pt.
+Increments less than this are insufficiently distinguishable at high
+resolution.
+
+Screened fills should be screened not less than 15\% (less will print
+as white) and not greater than 85\% (greater will print as black).
+
+Ideally, text included in graphics files should be font outlines
+rather than bitmaps, because the AMS typesets its publications on a
+high-resolution imagesetter, not a laser printer.  Text or lines in
+graphics which are 300dpi bitmaps (which look fine in the
+laser-printed output of your article) may appear poor in quality next
+to the high-resolution text of AMS publications.  If bitmaps of
+characters are part of bitmapped line art files, output will be
+satisfactory if the bitmapped characters are at 1200dpi.
+
+\subsection*{Color graphics}
+%%
+AMS publications are ordinarily printed in black and white.
+Use of color requires explicit permission from the AMS.
+
+Color figures should have the resolution of at least 266 pixels per
+inch when printed at 100\%, and must also be suitable for printing
+as grayscale.  The files must be in EPS format
+
+
+\section{Bibliographic references}
+%%
+\subsection*{Using \protect\bibtex/ to prepare a bibliography}%
+An author may find it convenient to maintain a file of references in
+\bibtex/ form, as described in \textit{The \latex/ Companion}
+\cite[Section 13.2]{LC}. Two \bibtex/ styles are provided:
+
+\begingroup
+\exindent=2\parindent
+\beginexample{\exboxwidth=1.05in}
+\exbox{}{amsplain.bst} will produce numeric labels; preferred for articles;
+\exbox{}{amsalpha.bst} will produce labels constructed from the %
+  author name(s)\newline and year of publication.
+\endexample
+\endgroup
+
+\noindent
+Both will translate references in a \bibtex/ input (\filnam{.bib})
+file to \latex/ input in a \filnam{.bbl} file in the form appropriate
+for AMS publications, including all necessary formatting instructions.
+This method of preparing bibliographies is therefore recommended.
+
+To access a \bibtex/ bibliography in a paper or monograph, include these
+instructions in the appropriate place in the input file:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibliographystyle{|?style>}|qquad|rm(|tt|0amsplain  |rm or|tt  amsalpha|rm)|tt
+\bibliography{|?name of bibliography |bgroup|tt.bib|egroup| file>}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Running \bibtex/ on the \filnam{.bib} file will produce a \filnam{.bbl}
+file.  The \filnam{.bib} file may have any name the author finds convenient;
+however, the \filnam{.bbl} file must have the same name as the source file
+for a monograph from which it is input, so it may be necessary for the
+author to rename it.  For an article, after the bibliography has been
+completed (including processing by \bibtex/), the contents of the
+\filnam{.bbl} file should be inserted into the main article input file,
+replacing the \cn{bibliographystyle} and \cn{bibliography} statements.
+
+Items in the bibliography are usually ordered alphabetically by author.
+\bibtex/ processing may alter this order, especially if the
+\filnam{amsalpha} style is used.
+
+All categories of bibliographic entries listed in
+\cite[Table 13.1]{LC} are supported in the two AMS \bibtex/ styles.
+In addition to the fields listed in Table 13.1, a \verb+language+
+field is provided for use in identifying the original language of an
+item whose title has been translated.
+
+The \pkg{harvard} package (available from CTAN) provides an
+author-year style that is compatible with the AMS document classes.
+This should ordinarily be used only for monographs on historical
+topics.
+
+Standard abbreviations for periodicals should be obtained from
+\cite{ASMR}\@.
+
+\subsection*{Preparing a bibliography without \protect\bibtex/}
+%%
+The references section of a paper is contained between the commands
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{thebibliography}{|?model label>}
+\end{thebibliography}
+\end{verbatim}
+This environment is resolved as an unnumbered section in an article
+or an unnumbered chapter in a monograph, following AMS publication
+specifications.  The indentation for the labels is set to an
+appropriate width using the model given with the \cn{begin} command.
+Thus the widest label in the bibliography should be used as the model;
+for example, \verb+99+ will provide space for a 2-digit numeric label.
+
+For the proper order of reference elements and use of fonts and
+punctuation, look at an issue or volume in the journal or book series
+for which your document is intended and follow the examples you see
+there.  More examples are given in \cite{MIT}.
+
+\subsubsection*{Reference input}
+%%
+Begin each item with the command \cn{bibitem\{\<bibitem label>\}}.
+The \latex/ default is to number references automatically; however,
+other labels may be used by inserting an optional key argument in
+square brackets between the command and the internal label:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\bibitem[ABC]{Arno1994}
+\end{verbatim}
+The item label and the key need not be identical.  Whatever appears
+within the \verb+[ ]+ is what prints; whatever is within the curly
+braces is used for linking and must not include any math or special
+characters.
+
+Give at least one full name; initials and last name is an acceptable
+form.  If a subsequent reference is by the same author(s), use
+\cn{bysame} instead of the name(s).
+
+For examples, refer to \cite{MIT}.
+
+
+\section{Monograph formatting}\label{s:mono}
+
+A monograph is a long work by a single author or co-authors on a
+single subject.  Each chapter should be prepared as a separate file,
+as should the bibliography.  In addition, a ``driver'' file should be
+used to input all the others.  These files should be given meaningful
+names, so that when they are transmitted to the AMS, there will be no
+question about which file represents which chapter.  For example, a
+monograph by author Grey might be composed of files named
+\filnam{grey.tex} (the driver file), \filnam{grey-ch1.tex},
+\filnam{grey-ch2.tex}, \dots, \filnam{grey-ch12.tex},
+\filnam{grey-appa.tex}, etc., and \filnam{grey-bib.tex}.
+If the author name is a common one, please include something to make
+it unique, such as first initials.
+
+Information that identifies the author(s), the subject matter of the
+monograph, acknowledgments of support, and so forth, will appear in the
+front matter of the book.  Place this information in the driver file,
+and use the tags shown below.  Most of these are the same as the tags
+associated with the top matter of an article; see the \textit{Top
+matter} section (page~\pageref{s:topmatter}) for explanations and an
+indication of which tags are required.
+
+\subsection*{Starting a new monograph}\label{s:newamsbook}
+%%
+The driver file for a monograph is generally made up of the following:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item \verb+\documentclass{...}+
+\item preamble (where extra definitions might go)
+\item \verb+\begin{document}+
+\item \verb+\frontmatter+
+\item title page and copyright page information
+\item \verb+\maketitle+ (to set the title page and copyright page; see note)
+\item \verb+\include+ files (e.g., preface, introduction)
+\item \verb+\mainmatter+
+\item \verb+\include+ files (e.g., main chapters, appendices)
+\item \verb+\backmatter+
+\item commands for bibliography, index
+\item \verb+\end{document}+
+\end{itemize}
+
+\noindent
+Note: The title and copyright pages are for information only, so that
+a printed copy can be associated with the correct author(s).  The final
+copy will be prepared at the AMS.
+
+For a typical driver file, see the template for \cls{amsbook}, included
+in the \amslatex/ collection.
+
+Instructions for preparing a dedication page are given in the AMS
+Author FAQ \cite{AF}.
+
+The table of contents will be produced automatically from a
+\filnam{.toc} file produced anew in each run of \latex/. Since there is
+no \filnam{.toc} before the first run, the body of the table of contents
+will be empty on the first run. It is AMS style to include only
+first-level heads, chapter titles, and part titles in the table of
+contents.
+
+Chapters in AMS book series start on right-hand (odd-numbered) pages.
+Blank pages will be provided as necessary at the end of earlier material
+to accomplish this.
+
+
+\subsection*{Chapter titles}
+%%
+Chapter titles should be capitalized as follows: the first and last
+words of the title and all nouns, pronouns, adjectives, adverbs, and
+verbs should be capitalized.  Articles, conjunctions, and prepositions
+should be lowercased unless they are the first or last word of the title.
+
+There are three common variations of the chapter title.  The form with
+a chapter number is most common:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\chapter{Matrix Algebras}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+The second variation is an appendix, where the word ``Appendix''
+replaces the word ``Chapter''. Use the command \cn{appendix} before
+the first \cn{chapter} command in a sequence of appendix chapters.
+\begin{verbatim}
+\appendix
+\chapter{Poisson Integral}
+\end{verbatim}
+In addition to ``Appendix'', the counter will produce letters ``A'',
+``B'', ``C'', etc.,\ instead of numbers.
+
+The third variation is used for an element such as a preface or
+introduction, which has no pretitle text at all.  For this, use the
+\cn{chapter*} command:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\chapter*{Preface}
+\end{verbatim}
+Unlike the \latex/ \cls{book} class, the AMS document classes will
+place entries for unnumbered chapters in the table of contents, as
+required by AMS style.
+
+\subsection*{Monograph running heads}
+%%
+The chapter title is used for the left running head and section
+headings for the right running head.  The chapter title repeats if
+there are no sections.  If the text of a section heading is too long
+to fit as a running head, use the square-bracket option to specify a
+shortened form for use in the running heads:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\section[Fourier coefficients of periodic functions]
+   {Fourier coefficients of continuous periodic functions
+   of bounded entropy norm}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+If the chapter title is too long to fit as a running head, a shortened
+form can be supplied in a similar way.  Full chapter titles and section
+headings will be used in the table of contents (this is different from
+basic \latex/).
+
+\subsection*{Numbering of figures and tables}
+%%
+The preferred AMS style for numbering figures and tables is to start
+numbering from 1 within each chapter, and to include both the chapter
+and element number in the printed caption heading.  For example, the
+first figure in Chapter 5 would be numbered ``\textsc{Figure} 5.1''.
+The \cls{amsbook} document class resets figure and table numbers
+automatically, but does not include the chapter number in the printed
+caption.  To add the chapter number, place these lines in the preamble
+of the driver file:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\numberwithin{figure}{chapter}
+\numberwithin{table}{chapter}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+
+\section{Getting help}
+
+Many questions raised by authors are answered in the AMS Author FAQ
+\cite{AF}.  Please check that before asking for assistance.
+
+If you encounter difficulties in preparing or submitting your
+manuscript in electronic form after it has been accepted for
+publication by the appropriate editorial board, you can ask for help
+from the \AMS\ at:
+
+\penalty-100
+\begin{samepage}
+\beginexample{\normalfont\mdseries}
+Technical Support
+Publications Technical Group
+201 Charles Street
+Providence, RI  02904-2294
+\vspace{3pt}
+Phone: 800-321-4267, ext.\ 4080 \quad or \quad 401-455-4080
+E-mail: {\texttt{tech-support@ams.org}}
+\endexample
+\end{samepage}
+
+\noindent
+Please supply the name of the journal or book series, the editor's
+name if the manuscript is for a proceedings volume, and a concise
+explanation of the problem.
+
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{[ASMR]}
+
+\bibitem[AF]{AF} AMS Author FAQ,
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/authors/author-faq.html}
+
+\bibitem[AFG]{AFG} \textit{AMSFonts{} version~\textup{2.2d} user's guide},
+Amer. Math. Soc.,  Providence, RI, 2002.
+PDF file linked from \texttt{http://www.ams.org/tex/amsfonts.html}
+
+\bibitem[AMP]{AMP} \textit{User's guide for the \pkg{amsmath} package
+\textup{(}version~\textup{2.0)}}, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 2004.
+PDF file linked from \texttt{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}
+
+\bibitem[AP]{AP} Author packages for publishing with the AMS,\\
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html}
+
+\bibitem[ARC]{ARC} AMS Author Resource Center,
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/authors/}
+
+\bibitem[ASMR]{ASMR} \textit{Abbreviations of names of serials reviewed in
+Mathematical Reviews}, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI,
+revised annually; searchable on-line at\\
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/msnhtml/serials-list/annser\_frames.html}.
+
+\bibitem[ATP]{ATP} \textit{Using the \pkg{amsthm} package,
+version~\textup{2.0}}, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 2004.\\
+PDF file linked from \texttt{http://www.ams.org/tex/amslatex.html}
+
+\bibitem[EG]{EG} Keith Reckdahl, ``Using EPS graphics in \latexe/
+documents'', available in electronic form as \texttt{info/epslatex.ps}
+or \filnam{.pdf} from\newline
+\texttt{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/}
+
+\bibitem[EP]{EP} Guide to AMS editor's package,
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/authors/editpkg.html}
+
+\bibitem[GB]{GB} David Carlisle, ``Packages in the `graphics' bundle'',
+available in electronic form as
+\filnam{macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.tex} or \filnam{.ps}
+from\\ \texttt{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/}
+
+\bibitem[GL]{GL} Helmut Kopka and Patrick Daly, \textit{A Guide to
+ \latex/}, 4th ed., Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA, 2004.
+
+\bibitem[HBW]{HBW} Nicholas J. Higham, \textit{Handbook of Writing for
+the Mathematical Sciences}, 2nd ed., SIAM, Philadelphia, PA, 1998.
+
+\bibitem[HWM]{HWM}
+Norman E. Steenrod, Paul R. Halmos, Menahem M. Schiffer, and Jean A.
+Dieudonn\'e, \textit{How to Write Mathematics}, 5th printing 1995,
+Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1973.
+
+\bibitem[Joy]{Joy} M. D. Spivak, \textit{The Joy of \tex/},
+2nd revised ed., Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1990.
+
+\bibitem[LC]{LC} Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens, with
+Johannes Braams, David Carlisle and Chris Rowley,
+\textit{The \latex/ Companion}, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley Co.,
+Reading, MA, 2004.
+
+\bibitem[LGC]{LGC} Michel Goossens, Sebastian Rahtz, and Frank Mittelbach,
+\textit{The \latex/ graphics Companion}, Addison-Wesley Co., Reading,
+MA, 1997.
+
+\bibitem[MIT]{MIT} Ellen E. Swanson, updated by Arlene O'Sean and
+Antoinette Schleyer, \textit{Mathematics into Type},
+Updated ed., Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1999.
+
+\bibitem[ML]{ML} George Gr\"{a}tzer, \textit{Math into \latex/},
+3rd ed., Birkh\"{a}user, Boston, MA/Springer Verlag, NY, 2000.
+
+\bibitem[MSC]{MSC} \textit{\textup{2000} Mathematics subject classification},
+Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI, 1999; searchable on-line at
+\texttt{http://www.ams.org/msc/}.
+
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/manifest.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/manifest.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..9cc4cd958e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/manifest.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+texmf/bibtex/bst/ams/
+  amsalpha.bst
+  amsplain.bst
+
+texmf/doc/latex/amscls/
+  amsart.template
+  amsbook.template
+  amsproc.template
+  amsthdoc.pdf
+  diffs-c.txt
+  instr-l.pdf
+  thmtest.pdf
+
+texmf/source/latex/amscls/
+  00readme.txt
+  ams-c1.ins
+  amsalpha.bst
+  amsart.template
+  amsbook.template
+  amsclass.dtx
+  amsdtx.dtx
+  amsmidx.dtx
+  amsplain.bst
+  amsproc.template
+  amsthdoc.tex
+  diffs-c.txt
+  install.txt
+  instr-l.tex
+  manifest.txt
+  thmtest.tex
+  upref.dtx
+
+texmf/tex/latex/amscls/
+  amsart.cls
+  amsbook.cls
+  amsdtx.cls
+  amsmidx.sty
+  amsproc.cls
+  amsthm.sty
+  upref.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/thmtest.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/thmtest.tex
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..21193949e83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/thmtest.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%% @LaTeX-file{
+%%%   filename  = "thmtest.tex",
+%%%   version   = "2.01",
+%%%   date      = "2004/08/02",
+%%%   time      = "14:18:27 EDT",
+%%%   checksum  = "26819 255 963 8277",
+%%%   author    = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%   copyright = "Copyright 1996, 2004 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                authorized only if either:
+%%%                (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                including name; OR
+%%%                (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                to some other name.",
+%%%   address   = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                Technical Support,
+%%%                Publications Technical Group,
+%%%                201 Charles Street,
+%%%                Providence, RI 02904,
+%%%                USA",
+%%%   telephone = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%   FAX       = "401-331-3842",
+%%%   email     = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%   codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%   supported = "yes",
+%%%   keywords  = "latex, amslatex, ams-latex, theorem, proof",
+%%%   abstract  = "This is part of the AMS-\LaTeX{} distribution.
+%%%                It is a sample document illustrating the use of
+%%%                the amsthm package.",
+%%%   docstring = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%% }
+%%% ====================================================================
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%    Option test file, will be created during the first LaTeX run;
+%    this facility is not available when using an AMS document class.
+\begin{filecontents}{exercise.thm}
+\def\th@exercise{%
+  \normalfont % body font
+  \thm@headpunct{:}%
+}
+\end{filecontents}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\documentclass{article}
+\title{Newtheorem and theoremstyle test}
+\author{Michael Downes\\updated by Barbara Beeton}
+
+\usepackage[exercise]{amsthm}
+
+\newtheorem{thm}{Theorem}[section]
+\newtheorem{cor}[thm]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{prop}{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{lem}[thm]{Lemma}
+
+\theoremstyle{remark}
+\newtheorem*{rmk}{Remark}
+
+\theoremstyle{plain}
+\newtheorem*{Ahlfors}{Ahlfors' Lemma}
+
+\newtheoremstyle{note}% name
+  {3pt}%      Space above
+  {3pt}%      Space below
+  {}%         Body font
+  {}%         Indent amount (empty = no indent, \parindent = para indent)
+  {\itshape}% Thm head font
+  {:}%        Punctuation after thm head
+  {.5em}%     Space after thm head: " " = normal interword space;
+        %       \newline = linebreak
+  {}%         Thm head spec (can be left empty, meaning `normal')
+
+\theoremstyle{note}
+\newtheorem{note}{Note}
+
+\newtheoremstyle{citing}% name
+  {3pt}%      Space above, empty = `usual value'
+  {3pt}%      Space below
+  {\itshape}% Body font
+  {}%         Indent amount (empty = no indent, \parindent = para indent)
+  {\bfseries}% Thm head font
+  {.}%        Punctuation after thm head
+  {.5em}%     Space after thm head: " " = normal interword space;
+        %       \newline = linebreak
+  {\thmnote{#3}}% Thm head spec
+
+\theoremstyle{citing}
+\newtheorem*{varthm}{}% all text supplied in the note
+
+\newtheoremstyle{break}% name
+  {9pt}%      Space above, empty = `usual value'
+  {9pt}%      Space below
+  {\itshape}% Body font
+  {}%         Indent amount (empty = no indent, \parindent = para indent)
+  {\bfseries}% Thm head font
+  {.}%        Punctuation after thm head
+  {\newline}% Space after thm head: \newline = linebreak
+  {}%         Thm head spec
+
+\theoremstyle{break}
+\newtheorem{bthm}{B-Theorem}
+
+\theoremstyle{exercise}
+\newtheorem{exer}{Exercise}
+
+\swapnumbers
+\theoremstyle{plain}
+\newtheorem{thmsw}{Theorem}[section]
+\newtheorem{corsw}[thmsw]{Corollary}
+\newtheorem{propsw}{Proposition}
+\newtheorem{lemsw}[thmsw]{Lemma}
+
+%    Because the amsmath pkg is not used, we need to define a couple of
+%    commands in more primitive terms.
+\let\lvert=|\let\rvert=|
+\newcommand{\Ric}{\mathop{\mathrm{Ric}}\nolimits}
+
+%    Dispel annoying problem of slightly overlong lines:
+\addtolength{\textwidth}{8pt}
+
+\begin{document}
+\maketitle
+
+\section{Test of standard theorem styles}
+
+Ahlfors' Lemma gives the principal criterion for obtaining lower bounds
+on the Kobayashi metric.
+
+\begin{Ahlfors}
+Let $ds^2 = h(z)\lvert dz\rvert^2$ be a Hermitian pseudo-metric on
+$\mathbf{D}_r$, $h\in C^2(\mathbf{D}_r)$, with $\omega$ the associated
+$(1,1)$-form. If $\Ric\omega\geq\omega$ on $\mathbf{D}_r$,
+then $\omega\leq\omega_r$ on all of $\mathbf{D}_r$ (or equivalently,
+$ds^2\leq ds_r^2$).
+\end{Ahlfors}
+
+\begin{lem}[negatively curved families]
+Let $\{ds_1^2,\dots,ds_k^2\}$ be a negatively curved family of metrics
+on $\mathbf{D}_r$, with associated forms $\omega^1$, \dots, $\omega^k$.
+Then $\omega^i \leq\omega_r$ for all $i$.
+\end{lem}
+
+Then our main theorem:
+\begin{thm}\label{pigspan}
+Let $d_{\max}$ and $d_{\min}$ be the maximum, resp.\ minimum distance
+between any two adjacent vertices of a quadrilateral $Q$. Let $\sigma$
+be the diagonal pigspan of a pig $P$ with four legs.
+Then $P$ is capable of standing on the corners of $Q$ iff
+\begin{equation}\label{sdq}
+\sigma\geq \sqrt{d_{\max}^2+d_{\min}^2}.
+\end{equation}
+\end{thm}
+
+\begin{cor}
+Admitting reflection and rotation, a three-legged pig $P$ is capable of
+standing on the corners of a triangle $T$ iff (\ref{sdq}) holds.
+\end{cor}
+
+\begin{rmk}
+As two-legged pigs generally fall over, the case of a polygon of order
+$2$ is uninteresting.
+\end{rmk}
+
+\section{Custom theorem styles}
+
+\begin{exer}
+Generalize Theorem~\ref{pigspan} to three and four dimensions.
+\end{exer}
+
+\begin{note}
+This is a test of the custom theorem style `note'. It is supposed to have
+variant fonts and other differences.
+\end{note}
+
+\begin{bthm}
+Test of the `linebreak' style of theorem heading.
+\end{bthm}
+
+This is a test of a citing theorem to cite a theorem from some other source.
+
+\begin{varthm}[Theorem 3.6 in \cite{thatone}]
+No hyperlinking available here yet \dots\ but that's not a
+bad idea for the future.
+\end{varthm}
+
+\section{The proof environment}
+
+\begin{proof}
+Here is a test of the proof environment.
+\end{proof}
+
+\begin{proof}[Proof of Theorem \ref{pigspan}]
+And another test.
+\end{proof}
+
+\begin{proof}[Proof \textup(necessity\textup)]
+And another.
+\end{proof}
+
+\begin{proof}[Proof \textup(sufficiency\textup)]
+And another, ending with a display:
+\[
+1+1=2\,. \qedhere
+\]
+\end{proof}
+
+\section{Test of number-swapping}
+
+This is a repeat of the first section but with numbers in theorem heads
+swapped to the left.
+
+Ahlfors' Lemma gives the principal criterion for obtaining lower bounds
+on the Kobayashi metric.
+\begin{Ahlfors}
+Let $ds^2 = h(z)\lvert dz\rvert^2$ be a Hermitian pseudo-metric on
+$\mathbf{D}_r$, $h\in C^2(\mathbf{D}_r)$, with $\omega$ the associated
+$(1,1)$-form. If $\Ric\omega\geq\omega$ on $\mathbf{D}_r$,
+then $\omega\leq\omega_r$ on all of $\mathbf{D}_r$ (or equivalently,
+$ds^2\leq ds_r^2$).
+\end{Ahlfors}
+
+\begin{lemsw}[negatively curved families]
+Let $\{ds_1^2,\dots,ds_k^2\}$ be a negatively curved family of metrics
+on $\mathbf{D}_r$, with associated forms $\omega^1$, \dots, $\omega^k$.
+Then $\omega^i \leq\omega_r$ for all $i$.
+\end{lemsw}
+
+Then our main theorem:
+\begin{thmsw}
+Let $d_{\max}$ and $d_{\min}$ be the maximum, resp.\ minimum distance
+between any two adjacent vertices of a quadrilateral $Q$. Let $\sigma$
+be the diagonal pigspan of a pig $P$ with four legs.
+Then $P$ is capable of standing on the corners of $Q$ iff
+\begin{equation}\label{sdqsw}
+\sigma\geq \sqrt{d_{\max}^2+d_{\min}^2}.
+\end{equation}
+\end{thmsw}
+
+\begin{corsw}
+Admitting reflection and rotation, a three-legged pig $P$ is capable of
+standing on the corners of a triangle $T$ iff (\ref{sdqsw}) holds.
+\end{corsw}
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{99}
+\bibitem{thatone} Dummy entry.
+\end{thebibliography}
+
+\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/upref.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/upref.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..843126b3b58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/amscls/upref.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+%%% ====================================================================
+%%%  @LaTeX-file{
+%%%     filename        = "upref.dtx",
+%%%     version         = "2.01",
+%%%     date            = "2004/07/29",
+%%%     time            = "16:37:01 EDT",
+%%%     checksum        = "07926 151 617 5530",
+%%%     author          = "American Mathematical Society",
+%%%     copyright       = "Copyright 1996 American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                        all rights reserved.  Copying of this file is
+%%%                        authorized only if either:
+%%%                        (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy,
+%%%                        including name; OR
+%%%                        (2) if you do make changes, you first rename it
+%%%                        to some other name.",
+%%%     address         = "American Mathematical Society,
+%%%                        Technical Support,
+%%%                        Electronic Products and Services,
+%%%                        P. O. Box 6248,
+%%%                        Providence, RI 02940,
+%%%                        USA",
+%%%     telephone       = "401-455-4080 or (in the USA and Canada)
+%%%                        800-321-4AMS (321-4267)",
+%%%     FAX             = "401-331-3842",
+%%%     email           = "tech-support@ams.org (Internet)",
+%%%     codetable       = "ISO/ASCII",
+%%%     keywords        = "latex, amslatex, ams-latex, cross references",
+%%%     supported       = "yes",
+%%%     abstract        = "This is a LaTeX package that provides printing
+%%%                        of \cn{ref}s in an upright font even if the
+%%%                        current context is italic or slanted.",
+%%%     docstring       = "The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
+%%%                        checksum as the first value, followed by the
+%%%                        equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
+%%%                        count) utility output of lines, words, and
+%%%                        characters.  This is produced by Robert
+%%%                        Solovay's checksum utility.",
+%%%  }
+%%% ====================================================================
+%
+%\iffalse
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass{amsdtx}
+\begin{document}
+\title{The \pkg{upref} package}
+\author{American Mathematical Society\\ Michael Downes\\
+  updated by Barbara Beeton}
+\date{Version \fileversion, \filedate}
+\hDocInput{upref.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%\fi
+%
+% \maketitle
+%
+% \MakeShortVerb\|
+%
+% \section{Introduction}
+%
+%    This package changes the \cn{ref} command so that it never applies
+%    a slanted font shape to its argument, regardless of context. This
+%    was the default behavior in \cls{amsart} version 1.1. Starting with
+%    \cls{amsart} version 1.2, upright references must be obtained via
+%    |\usepackage{upref}|.
+%
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Implementation}
+%    Give package name, date, version.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/06/01]
+\ProvidesPackage{upref}[2004/07/29 v2.01]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@noref}
+%    Give a warning if a cited reference isn't defined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand{\@noref}[1]{%
+  \G@refundefinedtrue
+  \nfss@text{\reset@font\bfseries ??}%
+  \@latex@warning{Reference `#1' on page \thepage\space undefined}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@setref}
+%    If the current fontshape is italic or slanted, we want to switch to
+%    upright/roman for printing the number of a \cn{ref}. This requires
+%    changing the \cs{@setref} command.
+%
+%    Since \cs{@setref} is modified by the \pkg{hyperref} package, delay
+%    the definition until \cs{AtBeginDocument}.  Then check whether
+%    \pkg{hyperref} is loaded.  If it is, we have to redefine some
+%    control sequences that \pkg{hyperref} defined in order to get
+%    upright references even in a \pkg{hyperref} environment.
+%    [tjk,bnb, 2004/07/29]
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We overload \cs{Hy@setref@link} as this is where the upright
+%    references get clobbered.  Used in overloaded \cs{@setref}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\Hy@setref@link#1#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
+      \begingroup
+      \toks0{\hyper@@link{#5}{#4}}%
+      \toks1\@xp{#7{\textup{#1}\hbox{}}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}%
+      \edef\x{\endgroup\the\toks0{\the\toks1}}\x
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%    We should not have to overload \cs{@setref}, but there is
+%    a chance that an author is using an old version of hyperref
+%    which does not use \cs{Hy@setref@link} in \cs{@setref}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\@setref#1#2#3{%
+      \ifx#1\relax
+        \@xp\protect\@noref{#3}%
+      \else
+        \@xp\Hy@setref@link#1\@empty\@empty\@nil{#2}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \def\@setref#1#2#3{\ifx#1\relax
+        \protect\@noref{#3}%
+      \else
+        \protect\textup{\@xp#2#1\hbox{}}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%  \begin{macro}{\@upn}
+%    The function \cs{\@upn} is used to force theorem numbers and
+%    similar elements to be upright in sloped or italic contexts.
+%    If a suitable italic font with upright numbers and punctuation is
+%    available, this function should be redefined to be a no-op.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\providecommand\@upn{\textup}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \end{macro}
+%
+%    The usual \cs{endinput} to ensure that random garbage at the end of
+%    the file doesn't get copied by \fn{docstrip}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\endinput
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \CheckSum{61}
+% \Finale
author	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2006-08-27 18:25:23 +0000
committer	Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>	2006-08-27 18:25:23 +0000
commit	505a11a94e5dc6b9010250a0cae90880e6e23182 (patch)
tree	86faf03bb38b3e09dcb5b3d438b36df8e1e11929 /Master/texmf-dist/source/latex
parent	167411792c3173bffe5cc7ff0412c92e7a3a83af (diff)